JP6679027B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game stand having a display means, with regard to a game stand such as a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine). SOLUTION: In the probability variation state, the number of prize balls obtained during a small hit game is not counted in the display of the total number of acquired prize balls during the small hit game, but is counted up after the end of the small hit game. In the probability change state, if the small hits are held consecutively, the number of prize balls won in the first small hit game is the party's first small hit even if the small hit game related to the first small hit is over. Even after the game is over, it is not added to the display of the total number of prize balls, and after the small hit game related to the second small hit, which is a holding consecutive chan, is over, the first small hit game and the second small hit game are finished. The number of prize balls obtained in the winning game is added up and counted up to display the total number of prize balls acquired. [Selection diagram] Fig. 37

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning drum game machine (slot machine).

  Gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction in which the game balls fall in the game area of the game board, as well as winning openings, starting openings, and variable winning openings that allow the game balls to win. It is common. When a game ball is won in these, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (for example, refer to Patent Document 1 and the like).

  In addition, in such a gaming table, one provided with display means is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game table having a display means.

The first gaming table of the present invention which solves the above object,
Control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
An attacker that can win game balls,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Symbol variable display results a state change available-the second state the attacker from a first state in response to become Koatari,
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state,
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
Wherein the second gaming state is that it related game ball with increased easily Koatari lash state to be the Koatari than the first game condition,
One of the plurality of displays is a total prize ball count display,
The total prize ball count display is a display showing the total prize ball count obtained by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods advantageous to the player including the second game state,
In the second game state, when the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning prizes may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed.
In the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, After the end of the second state, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, and then the attacker becomes the second state. Then, after the second state is completed, addition of the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker to the total acquired award ball number display is performed ,
The certain condition is a condition in which the result of the symbol variation display being executed and the result of the symbol variation display in which execution is suspended include a plurality of the results of the small hit,
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern variable display,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display may be displayed in the first display mode,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display may be displayed in the second display mode,
The size of the decorative design in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative design in the second display mode,
In the second gaming state, during the period during which the symbol variation display is being held when the second state is finished (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period"), in the first display mode. The decorative symbol variable display is displayed, but when the certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the second display mode even during the certain period.
It is characterized by the following.
In addition, the second game table of the present invention for solving the above-mentioned object,
Control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
An attacker that can win game balls,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
A gaming machine equipped with,
It is possible to change the state of the attacker from the first state to the second state in response to the result of the symbol variation display being a small hit,
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state,
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second game state is a small hit rush state in which the game balls are likely to increase in association with the small hit compared to the first game state,
One of the plurality of displays is a total prize ball count display,
The total prize ball count display is a display showing the total prize ball count obtained by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods advantageous to the player including the second game state,
In the second game state, when the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning prizes may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed.
In the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, After the end of the second state, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, and then the attacker becomes the second state. Then, after the second state is finished, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of award winning balls display,
The certain condition is a condition in which the result of the symbol variation display being executed and the result of the symbol variation display in which execution is suspended include a plurality of the results of the small hit,
Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state has ended. In the case where the number of award balls is not added to the total number of award balls display, the attacker becomes the second state after the second state ends, and the second state is After the end, in at least a part of the period until the addition of the number of award balls that has not yet been added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker to the total number of award balls , Displayed in a state in which the display mode of the total number of acquired prize balls display is changed to another display mode,
It is characterized by

  According to the game table of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on a main control lamp board arranged on the game board. FIG. It is a figure explaining the composition of a variable winning device. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. It is an example of a display symbol of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the table for general-purpose adequacy determination, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the table for special-figure 1 and 2 propriety determination, (c) is a special figure determination It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part of a pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part of a pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interruption process. It is a flow chart, (c) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing, and (d) is a flow chart of the 2nd sub control part image control processing. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a concrete structure of an accessory ratio / setting indicator, (B) is a figure which shows an example of a concrete structure of a DIP switch board. (A) is a timing chart explaining an example of an operation in the case where the special figure 2 is a big hit during the change of the special figure 1, and (b) is a small hit of the special figure 2 during the change of the special figure 1. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example of an operation in the case where the condition is exceeded. (A) is a timing chart explaining an example of the operation in each symbol display device in the normal gaming state, (b) is an example of the operation in each symbol display device in the case of a small hit in the normal gaming state It is a timing chart. It is a flow chart explaining the 1st setting suggestion production execution processing. It is a flow chart for explaining the notice effect determination process. It is a flow chart explaining the suggestion production selection processing at the time of the first big hit. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the continuous notice selection table at the time of SP reach selection, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the setting suggestion production selection table at the time of SP reach selection, (c) FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a setting suggestion effect selection table for the first time normal jackpot re-lottery selection, and FIG. It is a figure explaining the content of the number-of-outsets setting suggestion production selection table, (a) is a figure showing an example of the contents of the number-of-outsets setting suggestion production selection table for setting 4, and (b) is a setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the number output suggestion production suggestion table for 5 numbers, and (c) is an example of content of the number production suggestion production effect production selection table for 6 sets. (A) is a timing chart explaining an example of the operation in each symbol display device when the variation of the special figure 1 starts during the small hit game in the normal game state, and (b) is the small state in the normal game state It is a timing chart explaining an example of an operation in each symbol display device when hit. It is a figure showing an example of the production concerning the decorative design variable display centering on the decorative design display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in the big hit game which centers on the decorative design display in stages. It is the figure which shows one example of the production in the probability variation game state which centers on the decorative design display in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion production centering on a decorative pattern display device in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion production centering on a decorative pattern display device in steps. It is a figure showing an example of a re-lottery effect centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is the figure which shows one example of setting suggestion production in the big hit game state centering around the decorative design display device in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuous notice production centering on a decorative pattern display device in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion production in a decorative design variable display centering on a decorative design display device in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion production in a decorative design variable display centering on a decorative design display device in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion production centering on a decorative pattern display device in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a staged production centering on a decorative pattern display device in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a pre-reading notice production centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which relates to the decorative design fluctuation display which centers on the decorative design display in stages. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which relates to the decorative design fluctuation display which centers on the decorative design display in stages. It is the figure which shows one example of the production regarding the total acquisition prize sphere number display which centers on the decorative design display in stages. It is the figure which shows one example of the production regarding the total acquisition prize sphere number display which centers on the decorative design display in stages. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows a casino machine, (b) shows the mobile telephone provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention, (c) ) Shows a portable game machine provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) shows a home-use television game provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. And (e) shows a data server that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a game table according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage plate-equipped door 108, and a firing. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed, and the inside thereof is formed by a frame shape. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, a light source having an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pushing an opening lever 1081 which can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage tray for detecting that the door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a top plate 126 which can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and which is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launcher 110. , A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation, and a player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. Ball firing handle 134 to be launched into the game area 124, an effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by a player's operation, and an effect button 136 incorporated therein. A chance button lamp 138 that causes the button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit. And a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 190 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The payout device 152 is made of a tubular member, and has a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside thereof. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached at a predetermined position, it is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have been temporarily retained are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either one of a high signal and a low signal is output, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount according to the grant condition is granted (paid out) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 5) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. A second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing relating to effects, and a payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to paying out game balls ( (See FIG. 5) and a payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game shop staff, and relating to the launch of a game ball. A firing board case 176 accommodating a firing board 174 that constitutes a firing control section 630 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing, and a power supply control section 660 (see FIG. 5) that supplies power to various electric gaming machines are formed. A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182, which includes a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by an operation of a game shop staff and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, Also, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit is provided.

  Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated under the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities can be set. Can be moved to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display unit 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. The configuration may be such that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

  The accessory ratio / setting indicator 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner visible to the clerk. As shown in FIG. 12 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display unit 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged vertically, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED is modularized on the right side. The character ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the character ratio (YH) and the continuous character ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting indicator 196 is composed of, for example, a red single color LED, but may be one capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green and orange, or may be a full color LED. At least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the dip switch board 198 is arranged on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the DIP switch board 198 will be described later.

  FIG. 3A is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. Here, the arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions in the state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed to the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction of the pachinko machine 100 (may be referred to as the left-right direction), and in a front view, the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction of the pachinko machine 100 (may be referred to as the vertical direction), and the higher side may be referred to as the upper side and the lower side may be referred to as the lower side. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 100 (may be referred to as front-back direction), the front side may be referred to as front or front, and the back side may be referred to as back or rear.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  Although various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, for example, the front view left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the front side right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 and set while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as a center. With such a structure, workability can be improved. There are cases.

  The game board 200 is a unit in which various components are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, resin, and the surface (front surface) thereof constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by sticking a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the main body 201. When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, game stop that disables continuation of the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined and formed. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

  A region other than the game region 124 of the game board 200 may be called a non-game region. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. In addition, a region inside a region through which the game ball passes with the emission strength of the game ball being maximized can be referred to as at least a game region 124. The game area 124 may include an area where the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the rendering device and the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area because the game balls flow down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area because the game balls do not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire game area 124 can be called a downflow area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a rendering device or the like may be called a non-downflow area.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. Below the game area 124, a main control lamp board 254 is provided, and as shown in FIG. 3B, on the main control lamp board 254, a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol. Display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, the second special symbol holding lamp 220, the high-accuracy medium lamp RK, and the electricity support medium lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are provided. In addition, hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is composed of two LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by two LEDs in this embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of pending universal figure variation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the universal figure variation games are retained up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 is the lamp in order to indicate the number of special figure fluctuation game which has been reserved, in this execution form, it holds the special figure fluctuation game to a specified number (for example, 4). It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure fluctuation games that are held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

  The high-probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high-probability state. The electric power assisting lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the vane member 231a of the electric tulip, which will be described later, is in an electric power assisting state in which it is easy to open for a long time as well as the variable display time of the symbol is shortened. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for showing that the player can benefit from the right-handed hitting by being in the big hit game state, the probability change state and the electric support state. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the big hit game related to the big hit, when the big hit is reached.

  Around the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226a, a universal figure starting port 228, first special figure starting ports 230 and 231, and a big hit generation gate 252 are arranged. In addition, a variable winning device 2340 is provided in the lower right part of the game area 124.

  One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided at appropriate places in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a.

 When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and it is determined that the general winning opening 226a is won, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are won. The balls are discharged to the upper plate 126. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided, the balls may be detected by different sphere detection sensors, respectively. The ball passages for guiding the game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, they may be detected by different sphere detection sensors. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, but a predetermined number of prizes (for example, one) when the ball is entered The balls may be paid out, and the entered game balls may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, two first special figure starting ports 230 and 231 are arranged vertically below the center of the game board 200. In the following description, for convenience, the first special figure starting port 230 provided above is referred to as a “first special figure starting port (upper) 230”, and the first special figure starting port 231 provided below is referred to. It may be referred to as "first special map starting opening (bottom) 231". When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting opening (upper) 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are picked up as prize balls. While discharging to the plate 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, when hitting to the right, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure starting port (upper) 230. ing. In the present embodiment, the specification for starting the variable display of the special maps regardless of whether or not one of the special maps is performing the variable display of the other of the special maps 1 and 2 Pachinko machines with different specifications are sometimes referred to as "simultaneous fluctuation machines.").

  The first special figure starting port (bottom) 231 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chu), is arranged below the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and is provided with blade members 231a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade member 231a is closed, it is impossible to enter the ball, and when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and displays the symbol, the blade member 231a has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined period. Open and close the number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting opening (lower) 231, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls is used as a prize ball to the upper plate 126. Along with discharging to, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the universal figure starting port 228 (by a game nail (not shown)), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the universal figure starting port 228 when left-handed. . Therefore, as a general rule, while the player is left-handed, he / she does not win the universal figure variation game, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 231a does not open or close. On the other hand, if the player hits to the right, he or she can expect the game ball to enter the universal figure starting port 228, so that the blade member 231a may be opened and closed by winning the universal figure variation game. That is, there is almost no possibility of winning the first special map starting opening (bottom) 231 during left-handing, but there is a possibility of winning the first special drawing starting mouth (bottom) 231 during right-handing. It can be said that there is.

  Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the variable winning device 2340. In FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b is shown transparently in order to easily describe the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340.

  The variable winning device 2340 has, for example, a flat plate shape, and is provided with a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 2340a at a predetermined interval. There is.

  The mounting base 2340a is provided with a rectangular opening in the approximate center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover the opening. The lower end side of the first door member 2341a is axially supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning port 234a is configured as described above. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number (eg, 8) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the first variable winning port 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a second variable winning port 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b is configured such that a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e is erected rearward from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. The decorative member 2340b is formed with a first rolling area SP1 and a second rolling area SP2 in which the game balls can roll due to the wall surface, and the open portion at the rear thereof is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

  The first rolling area SP1 is open at the upper side, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be capable of advancing and retracting in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the open portion. The shutter member 2351a is inclined downward from the front and is inclined from right to left, and is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 5). That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state of advancing forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a (closed state), the first rolling area SP1 is closed, and the first of the game balls is closed. The entry into the rolling area SP1 is blocked, and the first rolling area SP1 is opened when it is in the state of retracting backward (open state), and the game ball enters the first rolling area SP1. Entry is permitted. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of ribs 2340i project rearward at substantially equal intervals on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b so as to face the shutter member 2351a, and are in a closed state. By colliding with the game ball rolling on the 2351a, the game ball is decelerated, and the staying time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is lengthened. In this embodiment, since it is configured in this way, a plurality of game balls mainly staying on the shutter member 2351a are secondly changed at the same time by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds). In some cases, it may be possible to enter the winning hole 235a. Further, in the present embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the shutter member 2351a.

  At the position where the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2 are connected to each other, a winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged, and enters the first rolling area SP1. When the played game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided leftward, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning to the second variable winning port 235a and the number based on the winning (eg, 15 pieces). ) Process for paying out prize balls. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable winning port 235a is greater than the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable winning port 234a. You may be able to.

  The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. The second rolling area SP2 is configured to be guided to the general passage 2340h and discharged downward. A discharge ball detection switch SW3 is provided in the general passage 2340h, and the game ball guided in the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The discharge ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

  In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of game balls passing through the prize count switch SW1 and the number of passing discharge ball detection switches SW3 into / from the second variable winning port 235a of the game ball. It may be possible to monitor fraudulent winnings by monitoring outs. Examples of the illegal act include an act using a ball with a thread or a game ball (so-called a big ball) having a size larger than a regulation.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning port 234a, and a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232. In this case, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls, and the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the second special figure starting port 232, when the player hits left, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second special figure starting port 232, but it strikes right. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball at a high frequency by arranging the nails around it. Incidentally. The second special figure starting port 232 may be provided on the downstream side of the second variable winning port 235a.

  Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting ball direction changing members called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening. Also, an out port 240 is provided for guiding the balls that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod and The launch mallet allows the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to pass through and launches the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, a game nail, etc., and wins a prize hole (general winning hole 226a, first variable winning hole 234a, second Variable winning opening 235a) or starting opening (first special drawing starting opening (upper) 230, first special drawing starting opening (lower) 231, second special drawing starting opening 232), or which winning opening or starting Without reaching the mouth, or only passing through the universal figure starting port 228, the player reaches the out port 240. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed on the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, An out ball detection sensor SWout for detecting passage of the game ball received in the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position of the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls won in various winning ports) are received in the discharge ball receiving port, Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game ball discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

  In addition, the production device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the production device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the production device 4 is arranged in each of the left side and the right side. Behind each effect device 4, an effect device 5 described later is arranged. In the case of this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to enter the game ball in the closed state of both the first variable winning port 234a and the second variable winning port 235a, but it may be possible to win the prize and at least the open state. It should be difficult if the game ball is difficult to enter.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 for controlling, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit according to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built therein). It is equipped with. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, a winning opening, and a variable winning opening, and a lower plate full tank sensor. However, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the first special symbol display device 212. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the 2 special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, Universal figure holding lamp 216, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp RK, electric support middle lamp RD, right striking lamp RM, round display Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of a pump, for example, a driving means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 231a of a first special figure starting port (lower) 231 as an ordinary electric accessory, A driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the door member 2341a of the first variable winning a prize port 234a and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning a prize port 235a as a special electric accessory is connected. are doing. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 or the first special figure starting port (lower) 231, the sensor circuit 322 has detected the ball. Is output to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the values at the timings of the counters corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 231, and the latched value corresponds to the special figure 1. It is stored in the built-in counter value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is similarly set. The latched value is stored in the internal counter value storage register corresponding to FIG.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 outputs the start signal output circuit 340 from the start signal output circuit 340. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300 from the first sub-control unit 400. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times, and the like. The serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game underframe lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect devices 2 to 5, and a sensor circuit. 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 outputs detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the rendering devices 2 to 5 and the like, and a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons that form the rendering button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. 516 and are mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is configured by a recording medium (for example, EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain the storage state even when the power is cut off. Thus, for example, the information for displaying the display regarding the big hit history can be held even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. A RAM may be used in which stored information is volatilized when the power is cut off.

  Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of ball rentals. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like. When 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout controller 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout controller 600 outputs the door opening information to the main controller 300.

  The launch control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134, which is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIGS. 6A to 6D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

  Special Figure 1 start game (upper) 230 or Special Figure 1 start opening (lower) 231 special Figure 1 variation game is conditioned that the first starting hole sensor is a ball detection sensor that the ball has entered Starting, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the second starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special figure 2 starting mouth 232. When the special game 1 variation game is started, the first special map display device 212 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). "Variation display" (special figure variation game) is performed. When the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 causes some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) to blink. 2 fluctuation display ”(special figure fluctuation game) is performed. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 in a stopped manner, and the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 6A shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 6A, three types of special drawings, “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing C” are shown. In FIG. 6A, a white portion in the drawing shows a lamp which is turned off, and a black portion shows a lamp which is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol A” and “special symbol B”) are prepared as stop symbol aspects of the special symbol. "Special drawing A" is a 6 round (R) normal big hit symbol, and when "Special drawing A" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning a prize port 234a is shifted to a big hit game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and the big hit. After the game is over, the control state becomes the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. Also, "special map B" is a 6R probability variation big hit symbol, and when "special map B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning a prize port 234a shifts to the big hit game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. In this embodiment, two kinds of big hit symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more kinds of big hit symbols may be prepared. In addition, you may prepare a jackpot that is practically difficult to win in some rounds. Also, a small hitting pattern may be prepared.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether to be a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is that the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state with a low probability is special This is called a low probability state. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure changes between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state. It is structured so that the times vary greatly. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state, such as shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as “probable probability variation”), and the state that is not a short period of time is referred to as a low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric power support state” is a state related to a general map, and the “time saving state” is a state related to a special map or a state related to a general map and a special map. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 0/100 (that is, it will always be out of bounds) in the universal figure low probability state (non-electrical support state), whereas the universal figure high probability state (electrical support state) ), It rises to 100/100 (that is, it always becomes a hit). Further, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Further, in the electric power support state, the opening time in one time opening of the blade member 231a of the starting point (bottom) 231 of Toku-zu 1 tends to be longer than in the non-electric power support state (extension of the electric tube opening period). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the power-chew open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electrically-powered support state. Further, in the electrically supported state, the blade members 231a are more likely to be opened than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electric tube is increased). For example, the blade member 231a, which is opened only once in the non-electrically supported state for each winning of the universal figure starting port 228, is opened twice in the electrically supported state (opened for 2 seconds, closed for 1 second, and again for 2 seconds). Open). Due to the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening, the probability of entering the starting point (bottom) 231 of Special Figure 1 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu having a small number of prize balls particularly in a big hit game, and the first variable winning port 234a or the second variable winning port 235a (these variable winning ports may be referred to as "attackers"). This is because there may be a disadvantage to the player if the number of winning game balls to () is reduced. In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure change short, the electric Chu open period extension, and the electric Chu open count increase are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in an electric power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port (bottom) 231 of Toku-zu 1, the electric support state (time saving state) is established. Good. In the non-electrically-supported state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting opening (lower) 231 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting opening (lower) 231 changes between a difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and an easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting opening (bottom) 231 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the "special map A" is stopped and displayed, the electric power support state is maintained while the special map variation game is played 50 times after the big hit game that is subsequently performed, and the non-electric power is played on the 51st time. Transition to support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support (“special map B”) is won, the electric support state is not transitioned after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when the "special map A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the "special map B" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing C” is a lost design.

  FIG.6 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. In FIG. 6 (b), eight kinds of special drawings from “special drawing a” to “special drawing h” are shown, and five kinds of special drawings are jackpot patterns (“special drawing a” to “special drawing”). Fig. E "). "Special drawing a" is a 6R normal big hit symbol, and when "Special drawing a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning a prize port 234a shifts to a big hit game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game is finished. After that, the control state becomes the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. In addition, "special figure b" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure b" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning a prize port 234a shifts to the big hit game state in which it is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. In addition, "special map c" is a 3R certainty variable big hit symbol, which is a real 1R big hit that can be expected to win balls in one of three rounds, and when "special map c" is stopped and displayed. After the second variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds, the big hit game state is reached, and after the big hit game is finished, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. In addition, the "special map d" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and is a big hit that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of the six rounds. After shifting to the big hit game state in which the variable winning port 235a is opened in all rounds and the big hit game is finished, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. In addition, the "special map e" is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and is a big hit that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of the 10 rounds. After shifting to the big hit game state in which the variable winning port 235a is opened in all rounds and the big hit game is finished, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, two types of stop symbols (“special figure f” and “special figure g”) are prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the case of a small hit in the "special drawing f", after the symbol is stopped, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a opens only 0.06 seconds once, and in the case of a small hit in the "special drawing g" After the symbol is stopped, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a performs the opening for 0.06 seconds 12 times. That is, the number of game balls is more likely to enter the second variable winning port 235a when a small hit is made with the "special view g" than with a small hit with the "special view f", and a larger number of balls are delivered. You can get balls. Note that the opening time and the number of times of opening the shutter member 2351a can be set as appropriate. Moreover, the small hitting pattern may be one type. Further, in the small hit game, when the game balls enter the second variable winning port 235a by a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) or when a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired, a small amount is obtained. The hit game ends, and the shutter member 2351a is not opened thereafter. During the small hit game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, since it is a simultaneous variation machine, a situation in which the special figure 1 is in variable display may occur when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and the game shifts to the small hit game. . In this case, the variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted when it becomes a small hit in the special figure 2, and the variable display of the special figure 1 is restarted when the small hit game related to the small hit is finished. In addition, when the special figure 1 is a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 2 is in a variable display, or when the special figure 2 is a big hit and shifts to the big hit game, the special figure 1 is changeable. In this case, a situation may occur, but in this case, when one special figure becomes a big hit, the variation display of the other special figure is forcibly ended, the variation display result is discarded, and the outlier result is displayed. It will be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing h” is a lost design.

  FIG. 6C shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The special ball 1 start opening (top) 230, the special drawing 1 start opening (bottom) or the special drawing 2 start opening 232 has won a ball, that is, the special drawing 1 start opening 230 or the special drawing 1 start opening ( Decorative under the condition that the first starting opening sensor detects that a ball has entered (below) or that the second starting opening sensor has detected that a ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232. In the respective symbol display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the symbol display device 208, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” → ... There is a case where "variable display of decorative design" is performed in which the display is switched in the order of "9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the electric support state in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in accordance with the variable display in the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly displayed. In the probability change state in which the variable display is performed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state and the electric support state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed even if the variable symbol of the special symbol 2 is displayed, and the symbol variable symbol is displayed only on the fourth symbol or the second special symbol display device 214 described later. Is performed, in the probability change state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed even if the variable display of the special map 1 is performed, and the symbol variable display is performed only on the fourth symbol or the first special symbol display device 212.

  Aspects other than the case where the first special figure display device 212 definitely notifies the 6R probability variation big hit in the normal gaming state or the electric power support state, and the second special figure display device 214 definitely confirms that the 10R probability variation big hit is in the probability variation state When the big hit or the small hit is notified by, the decorative pattern of the same number other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of the decorative patterns arranged side by side (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. In the normal game state or the electric power support state, when the 6R probability variation big hit (“special figure B”) is confirmed and notified by the first special figure display device 212, the 10R probability variation big hit (“” by the second special figure display device 214 in the probability variation state. In the case of confirming that it is a special figure e ")," decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "or" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol of “special symbol C” or “special symbol h”, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, combinations of decorative symbols other than the combinations of decorative symbols described so far (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display of the decorative symbol (in the case of "variable display of decorative symbol"). There is also). The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by the control of the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 6 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a general figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public figure B" which is a deviating symbol. Based on the fact that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 by the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, the universal figure display device 210 alternately turns on the two vertically arranged LEDs. "Variation display" (universal figure variation game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6 (d), the white parts in the figure show the positions of the lamps that are turned off, and the black parts show the positions of the lamps that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as a variable display of the universal figure.

<Main processing of main controller>
Next, main processing main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main controller.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, a special figure determination random number value, and the like. In addition, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, random number value of special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures, which is divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the win / no determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for general drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the special figure starting information storage unit, a plurality of types of starting information are set as one set, and the starting information is stored for each area one by one in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, which has received the activation signal, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), an interrupt mask is set, an I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value that determines a period for executing a main controller timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, The process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), the setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and if the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), The process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps so as to execute the initialization process.

  When it is not determined to return to the state before the power failure (step S109; No), is the cause that the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk at a game shop or the like? It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that there is an operation). When it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that it is set (step S115; Yes), the setting change process is executed (step S117).

  When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio / setting display 196 blinks with "1" indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed in the state where the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6". Then it returns to "1". In this embodiment, at least one of the settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected, and the setting can be set by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing the setting to a desired setting. Is confirmed. At this time, the set value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. Then, after the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be re-displayed on the setting monitor for a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display unit 196. However, for example, it may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or may be notified by voice output. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the six-level setting of the settings 1 to 6 is used, but the setting may be other than the six-level setting, or the setting may not be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to “1”, but the setting value before the power is shut off is held and the held setting value is displayed. Good.

  If it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side ( Step S115; No), without performing the setting change process of step S117, moves to step S119.

  In step S119, an initialization process is executed to put the basic circuit 302 into the initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and when the power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (for example, A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in all areas to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether or not the checksum result is normal), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal) Executes an initialization process to initialize the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Further, at this time, a normal recovery command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command described later, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , To the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S121, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating processing, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  On the other hand, in step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been returned to the state when the power was cut off, and is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port status update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 5 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence / absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 stores various types of signals. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the presence / absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each of the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, previous detection signal storage area, and present detection signal storage area is compared, and It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main controller timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage region, the previous detection signal storage region, and the current detection signal storage region. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, there is a current detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226a, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing starting port (upper) 230, the first special drawing starting port ( Lower) 231, and it is determined that the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, or has passed through the universal figure starting port 228 and the big hit generation gate 252. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228, 252 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening (upper) sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting opening (upper) 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information. Judges that the first special figure starting opening (upper) 230 has won, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area is detected, and is accompanied by the subsequent winning of the first special drawing starting opening (upper) 230. If the information regarding the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with the winning of the subsequent first special figure starting opening (upper) 230 is performed. Branch to the subsequent process without performing. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information, and the prize determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, the result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in the numerical range of 0 to 99 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has completed one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

  In step S211, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for changing / stopping displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of fluctuating / stop display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning hole counter updating process, when the winning holes 234a, 235a, 226a and the starting holes 230, 231, 232 are won, the RAM 308 stores the number of prize balls provided for each winning hole or each starting hole. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of starting information are acquired if a predetermined condition is satisfied. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 5 are made up of 1 byte, and strobe information is set in bit 7 (when ON, data is set) and bit 6 are set. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, the universal figure state update process is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure variation display (the value of the general figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 are alternately turned on and off. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

  Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal pattern display device 210 is configured so that the two symbols constituting the normal symbol display device 210 are turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol. The two LEDs are controlled to be turned on and off. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the universal figure state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the normal figure stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 6D) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 6D). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbol that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the universal figure variation game is notified to the player.

  If the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 231a is set to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 231a of the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). Is output in the open state, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 231a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the drive of the blade 231a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the general-purpose state update process when the general-purpose state is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening / closing control of the universal figure variation game and the first special map start opening (bottom) 231 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the universal figure that is being held When the number of variable games is 1 or more, the result of the universal figure variable game is won or unwinned by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number storage area described above. If a winning decision is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and the universal figure display device 210 receives the universal figure display device 210 based on the obtained universal figure timer random number value. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored in the ordinary figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the ordinary figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure variation games is stored in the universal figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure variation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol and the variation time before the win / fail judgment processing, and makes a pre-determination. The result (special figure prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308.

  Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs configuring the special figure 2 display device 214 is set. The ON / OFF drive control is performed by repeatedly turning on and off the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 6R big hit flag, a 3R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the universal figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure e and 6R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 6B are on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, and the universal figure probability variation flag is off. In the case of either special map b or special map d, the 6R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special map a, the 3R big hit flag is on, When the figure probability variation flag is also on, the universal figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure c, when the small hit flag is on, either special figure f or special figure g, and when the loss flag is on Special drawing h 2 display 214 performs a LED lighting-off drive control of which constitute the, to set indicating that it is a special symbol 2 stop display of the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 10R probability variation big hit design (special figure e), 6R probability variation big hit design (special figure b, special figure d), 3R probability variation big hit design (special figure c), 6R Usually, one of the large hit pattern (special drawing a), the small hit design (special drawing f, special drawing g), and the lost design (special drawing h) is confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous fluctuation machine, the fluctuation display of special figure 1 may be displayed during the fluctuation display of special figure 2, but the special display 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, the lottery result is discarded and the off symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 at the timing of the big hit symbol of the special figure 2. Will be done. Further, in the case where the variation display of Toku-zu 1 is performed during the variation display of Toku-zu 2, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation display time of Toku-zu 2 has passed, The progress of the variable display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted at the timing of the small hit symbol display, and as a result, from the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 until the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. The time will be extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol of special figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special figure 2 variable game. Further, if the time saving number stored in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time saving flag is on, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, in order to wait for the game ball to pass to the big hit occurrence gate 252, a big hit standby state is set. In the present embodiment, until the game ball passes to the big hit generation gate 252 after the special map 2 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the big hit does not occur and the expiration date is not provided, but for example, the special figure 2 When the game ball does not pass to the big hit generation gate 252 after a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the stop display with the big hit pattern, the big hit may be extinguished.

  When the game ball passes the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update processing, while the special figure 2 is operating is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to stand by for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the game will be started, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing the special figure 2 waiting time provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period has ended (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer has changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the first variable winning port 234a or the second variable winning port 235a detects the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) 2134a (the second variable winning port) of the first variable winning port 234a A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in an open state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the shutter member 2351a of 235a, and the door opening time management provided in the RAM 308 is managed. Information indicating the release period is set in the storage area of the timer for use. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is closed by a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a). A signal to be held is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts and closes the door member a predetermined number of times (10 rounds, 6 rounds or 3 rounds in the illustrated embodiment) and starts at the timing when the door member is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for 3 seconds), that is, for a period in which an image is displayed to notify the player that the big hit by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. In the present embodiment, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the number of times for saving (for example, 50 times) is set in the time saving number storage section provided in the RAM 308, The time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the public figure, compared to the low probability state of the general figure, there is a higher probability of being hit in the variable figure game. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation is short). Further, in the universal figure high probability state, compared to the universal figure low probability state, the opening time in the single opening of the pair of blade members 231a of the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is likely to be longer (electric Chu extension). . In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 231a are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these Phenomenon Probability, Phenomenon Variance, and Den Chu is set is called Densapo (Starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, the general probability low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, during the big hit game, the first variable winning a prize port 234a (the second variable winning a prize port 235a), a predetermined number of game balls until entering There is a problem that many game balls enter the starting opening (bottom) 231 and the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit (the number of game balls) increases, which increases gambling. , To solve this. In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting opening (bottom) 231 is “1”, the number of coins played during the jackpot game does not substantially increase. The time saving flag may be kept ON even during the game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not operated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 1.

  For example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 variable display (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is set. Lighting and extinguishing drive control is performed by repeatedly turning on and off the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 6R big hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on, the universal figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure B is on, the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the general figure probability variation flag is on the special figure A, When the losing flag is on, the lighting and extinguishing drive control of the LEDs configuring the special figure 1 display device 212 are performed so that the special figure C is in the respective modes, and the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings that indicate that there is something. By carrying out this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines one of the 6R normal big hit symbol (special figure A), the 6R probability variation big hit symbol (special figure B), and the lost symbol (special figure C). Display. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous fluctuation machine, the fluctuation display of special figure 2 may be displayed during the fluctuation display of special figure 1, but the special display 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of special figure 2, the lottery result is discarded and the deviating symbol is stopped and displayed in special figure 2 at the timing of the big hit symbol display of special figure 1. Will be done.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 1 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the time saving number stored in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time saving flag is on, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during a big hit game (during a special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 1. The special figure 1 identification information indicating that it exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

  Also, if the result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, in order to wait for the game ball to pass to the big hit occurrence gate 252, the big hit standby state is set. In the present embodiment, until the game ball passes to the big hit generation gate 252 after the special map 1 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the big hit does not occur and the expiration date is not provided, but, for example, When the game ball does not pass to the big hit generation gate 252 after a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the stop display with the big hit pattern, the big hit may be extinguished.

  When the game ball passes the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 1 in operation in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds) Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 1 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined prize-winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first variable winning port 234a is detected) A solenoid for opening and closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning port 234a (a part of various solenoids 332) ), A signal for holding the door member 2341a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 1 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a, and for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that repeats the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (6 rounds in the present exemplary embodiment) and starts at the timing when it ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative pattern. In order to set to stand by while displaying an image informing the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is finished, the production standby period is shown in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information. In the present embodiment, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 50 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the RAM 308 is also set. Turns on the time saving flag provided in. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON. If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 1 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 1 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S229.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 2 is not performed, the state of special figure 2 is inactive, and it is not in the big hit game of either special figure 1 or special figure 2, and it is held. It is executed by using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area with the start condition that the number of special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more. . Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 is not performed, the state of special figure 1 is inactive, neither the special jackpot game of special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is held, and it is held. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area, with the start condition being that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. . That is, in the present embodiment, the special game 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether the special game 2 is in the variable game, and the special game 2 is in the variable game of the special game 1. Regardless of whether or not there is a variation game, it is configured to be able to start (simultaneous variation machine).

  The notification of the result of the determination whether or not the special figure variation game is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and in the present embodiment, in the probability variation state, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won. The notification of the lottery results of the lottery based on the special game 1 starting opening (upper) 230, the special drawing 1 starting mouth (lower) is given prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning, the normal game state and In the time saving state, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting opening (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting opening (lower) 231 is notified of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting opening 232. It is given priority over the notification of the lottery result. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variation game in the probability change state is a big hit, in parallel with the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232, or once the special figure 2 start The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the prize to the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is executed. There is a case. If the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a big hit, the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting mouth (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting mouth (lower) 231 In parallel with the notification of the lottery result, or by interrupting the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting mouth (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting mouth (lower) 231 The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the mouth 232 may be executed.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is obtained, and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-match by using the hit / miss judgment table stored in the table (judgment judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / miss judgment result. After the variable display, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / miss determination, the obtained random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of Toku-zu 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure state update process and the special figure-related lottery process described above are independently performed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so that a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time. The special lottery is not limited to this, and the lottery process or the variable game regarding the suspension of the other special diagram may not be performed depending on the state of the one special diagram. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, in the normal game state and the time saving state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is caused to perform the effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol 1. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed for the variable display of special figure 2, and in the probability change state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is caused to perform the effect display according to the variable display of special figure 2, while the variable display of special figure 1 is used. Although the effect display is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery result of each special map, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery result of each special map. May be provided and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when the fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are simultaneously performed, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present exemplary embodiment, a basic command, a winning opening winning command, an out-ball command, a launch position command, a special figure variation start command, a special figure variation stop command, a special figure stop type command (of special figure 1 and special figure 2 A command transmitted at the start of fluctuation, which is a command that specifies which one of special map 1 and special map 2 is stopped and displayed first), start command per special map, end command per special map, opening special winning opening Information that can specify the command type such as command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, setting command , Bit 0 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is the special figure variation start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-match flags, timer numbers selected in the special figure related lottery processing, and the like. In the form, when the special figure variation start command is set, the stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flag values, etc. are included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the big hit round number, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information is included in the command data, whether or not there is a prize at the special figure 1 starting opening (upper) 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting opening (lower) 231, and the special figure 2 starts. It includes presence / absence of winning in the mouth 232, presence / absence of winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, presence / absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235a, and the like. In the case of the prefetch result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information and the like.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, and the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, and off flag are selected, and the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing are selected. The information indicating the timer number, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-range flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure being held. The information indicating the number of 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, in the command data, the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, and the special figure being held are held. The information indicating the number of 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, information indicating the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

  Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full tank error. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, or the general-purpose display device 210 and the special-figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission processing (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

  Next, it is used in the universal figure related lottery processing (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the universal figure acceptance / rejection determination table, and FIG. 9 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 1/2 acceptance / rejection determination table. Yes, FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure determination distribution table.

  The universal figure propriety determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a universal figure propriety determination table used at the time of universal figure propriety determination. It should be noted that this table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this hit / miss determination table is used, there is no hit value in the normal probability low probability state, that is, the hit probability is 0%. In the high probability state, the range of random numbers is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). It should be noted that in the low general probability state (when the time saving is not in operation), the winning may be a certain probability (for example, 1%). The probability (for example, 1%) may be offset.

  9B is a table referred to when determining whether or not the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are valid, and which one of the settings 1 to 6 is set. The record to be referred to is selected depending on whether the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300.

  In the special figure low probability state of setting 1, the big hit is selected with the probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the big hit lottery determination of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the jackpot lottery determination of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (about / 199).

  In the special figure low probability state of setting 2, the big hit is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the big hit lottery determination of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the jackpot lottery determination of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (about / 192).

  In the special figure low probability state of setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of about 363/65536 (about 1/181) as a result of the big hit lottery determination of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state. As a result of the jackpot lottery determination of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (about / 180).

  In the special figure low probability state of setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (about 1/175) as a result of the big hit lottery determination of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the jackpot lottery determination results of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (about / 174).

  In the special figure low probability state of setting 5, the big hit is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (about 1/146) as a result of the big hit lottery determination of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the jackpot lottery determination of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, the jackpot is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (about / 145).

  In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the big hit lottery determination of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the jackpot lottery determination of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, a big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (about / 93).

  In addition, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6 and whether the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the small hit is selected as the result of the big hit lottery determination result of the special figure 1 The small hit is selected with a probability of about 6580/65536 (about 1/10) as a result of the hit determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 2. It should be noted that a small hit may occur in the special figure 1. Also, the probability of a small hit may be different for each setting.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the big hit probability in the special figure low probability state, but is equated with almost the same probability. It is set so that it is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting. The higher the setting, the easier the big hit, and the lower the setting, the harder the jackpot becomes. Therefore, the lower the setting, the harder it is to make a big hit, but when the state changes to the probability variation state, the number of small hits tends to occur more frequently than the high setting, and different game characteristics may be provided in some cases.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any of the settings, but the big difference is that the variation display time of special figure 2 is displayed. To be In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special map 2 in the special figure high probability state is selected to be, for example, 1 to 5 seconds. Therefore, in the special figure high probability state, as described above, when the player hits to the right, a large number of game balls are likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232. A large number can be done, and as a result, the frequency of small hits increases. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the frequency of small hits is high in the special figure high probability state, and thus may be referred to as "small hit rush". Further, in the state where the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that is held is four (full), the time taken to complete the symbol variation display of all the special figure 2 is one time of the special figure 1 Since it takes a longer time to consume the variable display of symbols, the big hit is less likely to occur in the special figure 1. On the other hand, for the fluctuation time of the special map 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, the fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special-characteristic low-probability state, if the player hits right, the frequency of entering the special-character 2 starting opening 232 and the probability of small hits do not change, but the time until the result of the variable display of the special character 2 is displayed is approximately Since it is every 10 minutes, even if it is right-handed, it is substantially disadvantageous to the player. In addition, in the special figure low probability state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 580 seconds in the case of the outfall and the small hit, but the fluctuation time in the case of the big hit is shorter than that, for example, It is set to 227 seconds.

  FIG. 9C shows an example of the special figure determination distribution table, and the stop symbol is decided based on the result of judgment of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 as described above. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300. In this special figure determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol aspect of the special figure (see FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B) is defined for each winning / decision result.

  First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit determination is a big hit, one of "special figure A" and "special figure B" is selected. As described above, the "special map A" is a 6R regular jackpot in which the first variable winning opening 234a is open, and the "special view B" is a 6R certain variation jackpot in which the first variable winning opening 243a is open. Each selection rate is ½ regardless of the setting.

  Next, if the result of the special drawing 2 hit determination is a big hit, any one of “special drawing a” to “special drawing e” is selected. As described above, the "special map a" is a 6R normal jackpot in which the first variable winning port 234a is open, and the "special view b" is a 6R sure variation jackpot in which the first variable winning port 234a is open. "Special figure c" is the 3R certainty variation big hit (the 2R out of 3R is the actual 1R certainty variation big hit because the second variable winning opening 235a is shortly opened), and the "special figure d" is , The second variable winning port 235a is a 6R certainty variation jackpot, and the "special figure e" is the 10R certainty variation jackpot, which is opened by the second variable winning port 235a. Each selection rate is 50/100 for "special drawing a", 2/100 for "special drawing b", 20/100 for "special drawing c", 3/100 for "special drawing d", regardless of the setting. “Special drawing e” is 25/100.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 hit determination is a small hit, one of the "special figure f" and "special figure g" is selected. As described above, the "special drawing f" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened once once, and the "special drawing g" is a short opening in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened 12 times at the maximum. It is a small hit that repeats. In the small hit, the opening time of the second variable winning port 235a once is as short as 0.06 seconds, but as described above, the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a stays. Since the structure is easy, a plurality of game balls can be inserted by opening and closing the shutter member 2351a once. Therefore, in the special figure probability changing state, it may be possible to increase the number of balls to be delivered between the big hits by generating a large number of small hits (particularly, small hits in the "special drawing g").

  In addition, in the present embodiment, since the big hit in the "special drawing c" is substantially the 1R probability variable big hit, when the big hit in the "special drawing c" occurs, the player is made to think that the small hit occurs. You may be able to.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, the input / output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, which is subsequent to step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is used as the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 according to the detection result. Perform processing to change to.

  In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, which is subsequent to step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if there is an instruction to the effect devices 2 to 5 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S319 subsequent to step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S303.

  FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S343 following step S341, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command is read out from the ROM (not shown), and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 516, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, it returns to step S403.

  FIG. 11B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined time when the timer interrupt is triggered. To be executed in the cycle. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443, which is subsequent to step S441, update processing of the other random number value for effect is performed.

  FIG. 11D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, a transfer instruction of image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc., and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455, Otherwise (step S453: No), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

  In step S455, parameter setting is performed based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 forms the display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In response to this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the image drawing end is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display unit 196, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the dip switch substrate 198. Is.

  As described above, the character ratio / setting display unit 196 includes the character ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the character ratio monitor includes a continuous character ratio (RY) and a character ratio ( YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current set value.

  Here, the continuous winning character ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired, which is due to the operation of the winning character when the winning character operates continuously (that is, the first in the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of gaming balls obtained by opening and winning the variable winning port 234a and the second variable winning port 235a. The ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls may be used. In addition, the winning character ratio is based on the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired, that is, due to the operation of a winning character (that is, the first special figure starting opening (bottom) 231, the first variable winning opening 234a, and the second winning opening 234a. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the 2-variable winning opening 235a and winning the prize. It should be noted that the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing starting opening (upper) 230, the first special drawing starting opening (lower) 231, and the second special drawing starting opening 232 relative to the number of out balls. Alternatively, it may be a ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning opening 226a.

  In the present embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous character ratio, when it is determined that the continuous character ratio exceeds 60%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the continuous character ratio is displayed in blinking, and then the continuous character ratio is displayed. Then, a security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the continuous winning role ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal mountable on the main board 156. This may allow the model application test of the gaming machine to be smoothly performed.

  In addition, as a result of calculating the character ratio, when it is determined that the character ratio exceeds 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the character ratio blinks, and then the security signal (YH ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but, for example, the emission color is changed. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and the position of each dip switch can be read when the power is turned on, and the appearance probability of the effect can be changed. It is possible to set the appearance rate, the entry rate of the production mode, and the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, an example of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above will be described. Here, FIG. 13A is a timing chart illustrating an example of the operation when the special figure 2 is a big hit during the change of the special figure 1, and FIG. It is a timing chart explaining an example of an operation | movement when the special figure 2 is a small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the variable display of symbols is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is the symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. After that, at the timing of t11, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the symbol, but in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is continuously performed. At the timing of t12 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of Toku-zu 1 has elapsed, one of the pending symbol variation displays of Toku-zu 1 is consumed and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Be started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is continuously displayed. After that, when the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t13 comes, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the off symbol. At this time as well, the variable display of the special figure 2 is continuously displayed. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t14 comes, one of the pending symbol variable displays of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol variation time of special figure 2 (for example, 227 seconds) elapses and becomes the timing of t15, special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, while the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is the remaining symbol variation. Regardless of the time, the special figure 2 ends when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the hit determination is discarded, and the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed. After that, when the symbol display time of special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t16 comes, the big hit game is started. After that, when the big hit game ends and the timing of t17 comes, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended are respectively digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 The variable display of special figure 2 is started at the same time.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the simultaneous variable machine, when the big hit symbol is displayed in the variable display of one of the special symbols, the result of the hit determination of the other special symbol is discarded and the outlier symbol is displayed. It has become so. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is pending when the big bonus in the special figure 2 is included in the special variation display, the big variation in the special figure 2 is performed. During the big hit game or the big hit game, the big hit announcement may be given in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 started after the big hit game.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 13B, the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which the small hit symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. After that, at the timing of t21, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol, but in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is continuously performed. At the timing of t22 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of Toku-zu 1 has elapsed, one of the pending symbol variation displays of Toku-zu 1 is consumed and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Be started. The variable display of the special figure 2 is continuously displayed. After that, when the symbol variation time of special figure 2 (for example, 580 seconds) elapses and the timing becomes t23, special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily interrupted at this timing. After that, when the symbol display time of special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t24 comes, the small hit game is started. Actually, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses and shifts to the small hitting game state, it shifts to the small hitting game through the waiting state of the small hit start wait time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Strictly speaking, after the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is set at the timing of t23, the timer subtraction of the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is started in the next main controller timer interrupt process. After that, when the small hitting game ends and it becomes the timing of t25, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 where the symbol variation display is suspended is digested, and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started. Actually, when the small hit game ends, the small hit game state ends after a waiting state of a small hit end wait time (for example, 0.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the special figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the symbol fluctuation time, which has been suspended, is restarted. After that, when the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t26 comes, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol. In the present embodiment, during the period of the small hit game due to the small hit occurrence of the special figure 2, since the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, from the start to the end of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. The actual time taken is longer than the predetermined symbol variation time (5 seconds), and more specifically, after the small hit occurs in special figure 2, the small hit game related to the small hit ends. It is the time that the time taken until (interruption period) is added. That is, if the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is out of order, the symbol variation time of special figure 1 should have arrived at the timing of t26 ', but a small hit has occurred. As a result, the result of the variable display of the special figure 1 is delayed until the timing of t26. At the timing of t26, the symbol of Toku-zu 1 is stopped and displayed, and after that, when the symbol display time of Toku-zu 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and comes to the timing of t27, the symbol variable display is suspended. The symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is continuously performed. In the present embodiment, the special hit 2 is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol, and after the symbol display time elapses, the small hit game state is entered, and the predetermined small hit start wait time is started after the small hit game state is started. While the small hit game starts after the passage of, the small hit game state ends when the small hit end wait time elapses after the small hit game ends, but with the small hit start wait time Either one of the small hit end wait times may not be provided, or both may not be provided.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the simultaneous variable machine, when the small hit symbol is displayed in the variable display of one special map, the progress of the symbol variable display of the other special map is temporarily stopped, and the small hit. When the game is over, the progress is resumed.

  In the present embodiment, an example of operating in the manner described above was introduced, but for example, a winning symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) stop> stop display weight (for example, 0.5 seconds)> hit (big hit, small hit) Win) Start weight (for example, 0.1 seconds for small hits, dozens of seconds for big hits (However, it may differ depending on whether it is the first hit.))> Big hit game or small hit game> Win (big hit , Small hit) end weight (for example, 0.1 seconds for small hits, tens of seconds for big hits (however, it may vary depending on whether or not it is the first hit.)) The operation may be performed. Here, "-start weight" and "-end weight" may be expressed as "-interval", and the hit start effect and the hit end effect are performed at this time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, but the symbol stops in the special figure 1. When it is displayed and a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 while measuring the symbol display time of the special figure 1, the measurement of the symbol display time of the special figure 1 is not interrupted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 14, in each symbol display device (first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208) in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above. An example of the operation will be described. Here, FIG. 14 (a) is a timing chart explaining an example of the operation in each symbol display device in the normal game state, and FIG. 14 (b) is each symbol display device in the case of a small hit in the normal game state. 3 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the operation in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the variable display of symbols is displayed in both special figure 1 and special figure 2, and the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the normal gaming state, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed according to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. After that, at the timing of t41, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a deviating symbol, but in the special figure 1, the variable display of the symbols is continuously performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also continuously displays the variable display of the decorative symbols. Is displayed. When the symbol display time of special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t42 comes, one of the pending symbol variation display of special figure 2 is exhausted and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is displayed. Be started. In addition, in the special figure 1, the symbol variable display is continuously performed, and in accordance with this, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the variable variable of the decorative symbol. After that, before the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fluctuation variation display is started with the combination of the decorative symbols that are off, the special symbol 1 is off at the timing of t43. In addition to being stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols that have been displayed due to the fluctuation. When the symbol display time of special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t44 is reached, one of the pending symbol variation displays of special figure 1 is consumed and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is displayed. With the start, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Similarly, before the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of Toku-zu 1 elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the shaking variation display is started with the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of alignment, at the timing of t45. While the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a detached symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the detached decorative symbols that are displayed due to the fluctuation. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special map 1 elapses and the timing of t46 is reached, one symbol fluctuation display of the special map 1 that has been held is exhausted to change the symbol of the special map 1. With the display being started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state or the electric support state, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1, and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 2 is displayed. Although the variable display of the combined decorative design is not performed, for example, the variable display of the decorative design may be performed in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2, for example, the variable display by the minimal design is performed. Alternatively, the fourth symbol may be displayed as to whether or not the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is being executed.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 14 (b), the symbol variable display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the normal gaming state, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed according to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. After that, before the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after starting the shaking variation display with the combination of the decorative symbols that are off, the special symbol 1 is off at the timing of t51. In addition to being stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols that have been displayed due to the fluctuation. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is continuously displayed. At the timing of t52 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of Toku-zu 1 has elapsed, one of the pending symbol variation displays of Toku-zu 1 is consumed and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. With the start, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. After that, when the symbol variation time of special figure 2 (for example, 580 seconds) elapses and the timing of t53 comes, special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily interrupted at this timing. However, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the variable display of the decorative symbol, although the progress of the symbol variable time of the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped. As a result, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended. After that, when the symbol display time of special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t54 comes, the small hit game is started. After that, during the small hitting game, after the shaking fluctuation display is started with the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of sync, the original symbol fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. At the timing of ', the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the make-up effect for a period to be described later. This is, the variation display of the decorative design is displayed in accordance with the original symbol variation time of special figure 1, but because the small hit occurs in special figure 2, the small hit game ends after the small hit occurs. Until then, the timing until the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed is postponed, so from the timing when the symbol variation time of the original special figure 1 elapses to the timing when the special figure 1 is actually stopped and displayed. During the period, the fluctuation display will continue to be displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns that are out of sync. Therefore, the player has an excessive expectation that the design will be delayed until it is stopped and displayed, which not only reduces the interest of the game, but also that the decorative design may be displayed variably and be a big hit. There is a case to let. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in such a case, it may be possible to solve such a problem by executing the staging effect. After that, when the small hitting game ends and it becomes the timing of t55, the symbol variation display of special figure 2 where the symbol variation display is suspended is digested, and the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is started. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the symbol fluctuation time, which has been suspended, is restarted. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, until the special map 1 is stopped and displayed, the staging effect is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol variation time of special figure 1 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t56 comes, special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol. At this time, in the decorative design display device 208, the special effect 1 is stopped and displayed in the off-design, and the production is completed in time, and the special design is stopped and displayed in combination. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and comes to the timing of t57, the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 in which the symbol variable display is suspended is digested, and the special figure 1 of The variable display of symbols is started. In addition, in addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is continuously performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed according to the variable display of the special figure 1 continues. However, for the duration corresponding to the period from the time when the original symbol variation time of the special figure 1 is actually stopped until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1, the player is allowed to perform the production while not getting tired. In some cases, it may be possible to suppress deterioration in playability. It should be noted that the time for performing the stage effect is the same as the time (interruption time) from when the special map 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol until the small hit game is finished, but not the same time. Alternatively, it may be executed at least during a period related to the opening / closing operation of the variable winning a prize opening (the second variable winning a prize opening 235a) in the small hit game. Further, a plurality of types of effects may be prepared for the time-stamping effect, or only one type may be prepared. Further, in the case of preparing the effect for a plurality of types, for example, the effect may be selected at random, or the type of the effect may be changed during the execution depending on a certain condition. More specifically, for example, the type of the staged effect may be changed depending on whether or not a specific SP reach is performed. Further, the timing for starting the execution of the time-stamping effect is not limited to that described above, and may be started at an appropriate timing, for example, the time-stamping effect may be started during the small hit game, Before the small hitting game starts, the staging effect may be started.

  Next, the first setting suggestive effect execution process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the first setting suggestion effect execution process. The first setting suggestion effect execution process is, for example, a process that is activated when an out-ball command is received from the main control unit 300. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the out-ball command, and may be activated when a prize-winning command is received. In the present embodiment, when the out-ball command or the prize-winning winning command is received, the first sub-control unit 400 counts points (setting suggestion points) according to the type. For example, when the first sub control unit 400 receives an out ball command output from the main control unit 300 when the game ball passes through the out ball detection sensor SWout, the setting suggestion point is counted as “1”, and the variable winning a prize port. When the first sub control unit 400 receives the winning prize winning command output from the main control unit 300 when the game ball enters the (first variable winning prize port 234a, second variable winning prize port 235a), the setting suggestion point Is counted as "10". It should be noted that, even when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the prize-winning prize command transmitted when the player wins another prize-winning hole, points corresponding to the prize-winning prize hole entered may be counted. . Moreover, even if the first sub-control unit 400 receives the out-ball command, the setting suggestion points are counted, and if the game balls win various winning openings, the setting suggestion points may not be counted. Good. Further, the points to be counted may be different according to the game state, for example, the count number by the reception of the out ball command is "1" in the normal game state, while the count number is "10" in the jackpot game state. It is easy to win the prize in the normal game state, or decrease the count number at the time of winning the special figure 1 starting opening (lower) 230 to increase the count number in the probability variation state or the electric support state, or during the big hit game. Then, decrease the number of counts when winning the variable winning openings (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a), and increase the number of times when winning the variable winning opening during the small hit game. May be. In addition, “1” may be counted when the out-ball command is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). In addition, the table for determining the number of counts for generating the first setting suggestive effect may be selected by the customization of the player.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the setting suggestion point (P) stored in the RAM 408 is “3000” or more (step S501). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting suggestion point is "3000" or more (step S501; Yes), the value of the setting suggestion point (P) is reset to "0" (step S503), and then the suggestion effect execution lottery. The process is executed (step S505). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the setting suggestion point is “3000” or more, that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion point is less than “3000” (step S501; No), this processing ends.

  In the suggestion effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the setting is high. Specifically, a determination table corresponding to preset setting values from settings 1 to 6 is read from the ROM 406, and a lottery is performed based on the read determination table to determine whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect. In the present embodiment, the determination tables corresponding to the settings 4 to 6 are prepared, and the occurrence probabilities are different from each other. For example, in setting 4, 1/4 and the first setting suggestive effect are likely to appear, in setting 5, 1/8 and the first setting suggesting effect are less likely to appear than in the setting 4, and in setting 6, 1/16. The first suggestive presentation effect is less likely to appear than in settings 4 and 5. In the present embodiment, the determination table corresponding to the setting 3 or less is not prepared, but it may be prepared. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may appear only in a specific period, and for example, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) symbol variation display There may be a case where the first setting suggestion effect appears only before the step is performed. With such a configuration, the player may be able to recognize that the setting has been changed. In addition, the appearance rate in each setting of the above-described first setting suggestive effect is merely an example, and the appearance rate can be appropriately set.

  Further, the first setting suggestive effect in the present embodiment is, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), in the lower right portion of the decorative pattern display device 208, the shoji opens, and a cigarette with a balloon of "high setting!" The Gol-grandpa character GLG that appears is appearing, which corresponds to the effect that at least suggests to the player that the setting is high. The appearance position of the Gol grandpa character GLG differs depending on the appearance timing, but may be the same. Needless to say, the content of the effect is not limited to this, and may be any content as long as it is an effect that at least suggests to the player that the setting is high.

  As a result of the lottery in the suggestion effect execution lottery processing, the CPU 404 determines whether to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S507). When the CPU 404 determines to execute the first setting suggesting effect (step S507; YES), the CPU 404 executes the execution timing selection process (step S509). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S507; No), this process ends.

  In the execution timing selection processing, the CPU 404 promptly selects whether to start the first setting suggestion effect or another timing. For example, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is started promptly with a probability of 70%, and the first setting suggestion effect is started with a probability of 30% at the start of the next symbol variation display. Note that when the first setting suggestion effect is executed, it may be started immediately without fail, or may be started at a timing different from the execution determination timing.

  As a result of the selection in the execution timing selection processing, the CPU 404 determines whether or not to start the first setting suggestive effect quickly (step S511). If the CPU 404 does not determine to start the first setting suggestion effect promptly (step S511; No), the start setting is performed so that the first setting suggestion effect is executed at the start timing selected / determined in the execution timing selection process. After performing (step S513), this process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines to start the first setting suggestion effect promptly (step S511; Yes), it determines whether or not a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. Yes (step S515).

  When the CPU 404 determines that the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (step S515; Yes), the CPU 404 performs a first setting suggestion effect execution lottery process for randomly selecting whether to execute the first setting suggestion effect (( Step S521). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the second setting suggestive effect is being executed (step S515; No), it determines whether the SP reach is in progress (step S517). When the CPU 404 determines that the SP reach is in progress (step S517; Yes), after the start of the symbol variation display started after the end of the SP reach, or after the start of the jackpot start effect, the first setting suggestion effect is produced. After the start setting is performed so as to start (step S519), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the SP reach is in progress (step S517; No), the process of step S513 is executed, and then this process is ended.

  Further, the CPU 404 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect as a result of performing the first setting suggestion effect execution lottery in the first setting suggestion effect execution lottery process of step S521 (step S523). When the CPU 404 determines to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S523; Yes), after the start setting is performed such that the first setting suggestion effect is continuously started after the second setting suggestion effect is completed ( In step S525), this process ends. In other words, by shifting the execution period of the second setting suggestive effect and the execution period of the first setting suggestive effect and eliminating the period in which both are performed at the same time, the player may be able to easily understand the effect.

  Next, the notice effect determination process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating the notice effect determination process. The notice production determination process is mainly performed when the main control unit 300 pre-reads that the special (SP) reach is executed in the special diagram pre-reading process (FIG. 8: step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process. A prefetch result information command including information indicating that the execution of the SP reach is prefetched is transmitted from the control unit 300 to the first control unit 400, and after the first control unit 400 receives this, the next symbol variation display It is a process that is activated when the symbol variation start command is received. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the description, when the SP reach is executed, the prefetch result information command including the information to that effect is transmitted. However, the prefetch result information command is not limited to the SP reach, and other types of When pre-reading the variable display of symbols, a pre-read result information command including information relating to the variable display of symbols may be transmitted.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the prefetch flag is already set in the RAM 408 (step S601). The prefetch flag is a flag that is set when the prefetch result information command is received from the main control unit 300, and is cleared when the prefetch notice ends.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the prefetch flag is set (step S601; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not the continuous notice flag is set (step S603). The continuous notice flag is a flag that is set while the continuous notice is being executed, and is cleared when the continuous notice ends. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the prefetch flag is set (step S601; No), the process proceeds to step S623.

  When the CPU 404 does not determine that the flag for continuous notice is set (step S603; No), the CPU 404 executes the continuous notice lottery process (step S605). Specifically, the lottery is carried out using the SP reach selection continuous notice selection table shown in FIG. Here, FIG. 18A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the SP advance selection time continuous announcement selection table.

  In the continuous announcement lottery process, the CPU 404 refers to the SP reach selection continuous announcement selection table shown in FIG. 18A when receiving the prefetch result information command including the information that the SP reach is prefetched. The record to be used is selected depending on whether it is a big hit or a big hit. In this continuous announcement lottery, the same table is selected regardless of any of the settings 1-6. Therefore, when the prefetch result information command including the prefetched information that the big hit SP reach (or the outlying SP reach) is executed is received, the continuous announcement is executed with the same probability regardless of the setting. It will be. Actually, since the jackpot probability differs between the settings, it can be said that the probability of occurrence of continuous notice also differs between the settings as a whole, but it is pre-read that the jackpot SP reach will be executed. It can be said that the probability that the continuous notice is executed in the case of being set and the probability that the continuous notice is executed in the case of being pre-read that the missed SP reach will be executed are the same regardless of the setting.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the CPU 404 receives the prefetch result information command including the prefetch information that the SP reach which is a big hit is prefetched, the CPU 404 executes the continuous announcement with a probability of 1/2. It is determined that the continuous announcement is not executed with a probability of 1/2. Further, when the CPU 404 receives the prefetch result information command including the information prefetching that the outlying SP reach is to be executed, the CPU 404 determines to execute the continuous notice with a probability of 1/5 and the probability of 4/5. It is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  As a result of executing the continuous announcement lottery processing, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement has been won (step S607). When the CPU 404 determines that the continuous announcement has been won (step S607; Yes), the continuous announcement flag is set (step S609), and then the combination of decorative patterns is “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. Are set so as to be a combination of chances (step S611), and the process proceeds to step S623. Here, the combination of the chances of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of outlying decorative patterns, and is a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed when a specific condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, there is a case where a continuous notice by a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is executed as a look-ahead notice, and a case where a combination of chances is stopped and displayed when a setting suggestion described later is performed.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S603 that the continuous advance notice flag has been set (step S603; Yes), the CPU 404 proceeds to the process of step S611 and sets the combination of the decorative symbols to the chance described above. .

  Further, when the CPU 404 does not determine in step S607 that the continuous announcement has been won (step S607; No), the CPU 404 proceeds to the process of step S613, and the symbol variable display is rotated 50 times after the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the following (step S613). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol fluctuation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on (step S613; Yes), whether or not the stop display of the chance as a suggestive effect has been performed in the previous symbol fluctuation display. It is determined (step S615).

  When the CPU 404 does not determine that the suggestion effect was executed in the previous symbol variation display (step S615; No), it executes the suggestion effect execution lottery process (step S617). Specifically, the lottery is performed using the SP reach selection time setting suggestion effect selection table shown in FIG. 18B. Here, FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the SP reach selection time setting suggestion effect selection table.

  In the suggestion effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 refers to the SP reach selection setting suggestion effect selection table, reads the record corresponding to the selected setting, and determines whether to execute the suggestion effect. Specifically, in the case of settings 1 to 3, the suggestive effect is not executed, in the case of setting 4, the suggestive effect is executed with a probability of 1/16, and the suggestive effect is executed with a probability of 15/16. do not do. In the case of setting 5, the suggestive effect is executed with a probability of 1/8 and the suggestive effect is not executed with a probability of 7/8. In the case of setting 6, the suggestive effect is executed with a probability of 1/4 and the suggestive effect is not executed with a probability of 3/4. Therefore, if the SP reach is executed and the continuous lottery execution lottery is missed, the suggestion effect execution lottery may be performed, and the probability that the suggestion effect is executed also differs between the settings. In the present embodiment, the suggestive effect is not performed in the settings 1 to 3, and the suggestive effect is easily executed in the order of setting 6> setting 5> setting 4. In addition, you may make it suggest suggestion also in the settings 1-3. In addition, the selection rate of the suggestive effect is not limited to the above-described one, but can be set appropriately.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on, the suggestive effect described below may be executed, and when the number of revolutions exceeds 50, the suggestive effect is generated. It is configured not to run. In the present embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed under the condition that the pattern variation display is within 50 rotations after the power is turned on, but the period in which the suggestive effect can be executed may be appropriately set. Alternatively, the period during which the suggestive effect can be executed may not be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop display of the chance as a suggestive effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the suggestion effect execution lottery is not performed in the next symbol variation display, The production is prevented from being continuously executed, and although this discourages the player from not having a continuous production, it is possible that the setting is so high that a chance as a suggestive production appears. Sometimes you can have expectations.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the table is set so that the probability of executing the suggestive effect changes according to the selected setting, but the setting is not changed when the setting is changed. The table may be set so that the suggestive effect is executed more easily than in the case. Further, the table may be set such that the suggestive effect is more likely to be executed when the setting is changed to the high setting than when it is not.

  As a result of executing the suggestion effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect has been won (step S619). When the CPU 404 determines that it has won the execution of the suggestive effect (step S619; Yes), it sets the combination of the decorative patterns to be a combination of chances of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" ( The processing moves to step S621) and step S623. In the present embodiment, as a suggestion effect, the continuous announcement or the suggestion effect is specified by stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative patterns of the chances of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" as in the case of the notice announcement. It is not possible, but in some cases the player can be expected.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine in step S613 that the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on (step S613; No), it determines that the suggestion effect has been executed in the previous symbol variation display. (Step S615; Yes), and when it is not determined that the execution of the suggestive effect has been won (step S619; No), the process proceeds to step S623.

  Next, in step S623, the CPU 404 starts the symbol variation display this time, which is the special symbol 1 of the special symbols 1 and 2, and is special during the execution of the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 this time. The variable display result of FIG. 2 is displayed, and it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S623). The CPU 404 can determine whether or not the special map 2 is stopped and displayed while the special map 1 is changing based on the special map stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 300. It is possible to specify whether or not FIG. 1 is a small hit. When the CPU 404 determines that a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (step S623; Yes), it determines whether the prefetch flag is set in the RAM 408 (step). S625). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (step S623; No), the notice effect determination process is ended.

  When the CPU 404 determines that the prefetch flag is set (step S625; Yes), the CPU 404 executes the prefetch notice lottery process for a while (step S627). In the wait-ahead read-ahead notice lottery process, the CPU 404, as shown in FIG. 14B, when a small hit occurs in the special symbol 2 during the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the initial After the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the effect is executed for a while, and during this time, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading notice as a performance (preliminary announcement effect for a while) is performed. In the present embodiment, whether or not to give the pre-reading notice in advance is performed with a probability of, for example, 1/2, but the pre-reading notice in advance may be given without fail.

  The CPU 404 determines whether or not the player has won the preliminary read-ahead notice lottery as a result of performing the preliminary read-ahead notice lottery (step S629). If the CPU 404 determines that the player has won the pre-reading advance notice lottery for a while (step S629; Yes), the type of small hit (whether to make a small hit with "special drawing f" or a small hit with "special drawing g") The setting is made so that the pre-reading notice effect is executed for a time corresponding to (step S631), and then this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine in step S625 that the prefetch flag is set (step S625; No), or does not determine in step S629 that it has won the pre-reading notice lottery for a while (step S629). ; No), and then proceeds to the processing of step S633 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of this special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach (step S633). When the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 this time is accompanied by SP reach (step S633; Yes), it is a makeover effect without including a notice, and while the background or the like is changed. Settings are made so that the motase stage change effect is executed (step S635). A small hit occurs in special figure 2 in the symbol variation display including SP reach, and it may take a long period until the symbol is confirmed and displayed after the SP reach is reached, but if fluctuations continue during this period However, there is a case where the player is given a sense of useless expectation that it will be changed again and become a big hit. In the present embodiment, when performing the stage production after the SP reach is performed, by performing the stage change production, it is possible to switch the disappointing mood due to the shift in the SP reach, and it becomes out. In some cases, it can be easily recognized. Regarding the special figure 1, the content of the staging effect may be made different between the symbol variation display that is out of order when the SP reach is executed and the symbol variation display that is out of step with the reach effect. Further, the stage change effect may be performed after the result of the execution of a certain SP reach having a high jackpot reliability is deviated. Further, in the case where there is a shift without the reach effect, the effect may be given for a while so that no stage change is involved. In addition, when a certain SP reach is executed and it is out of alignment, if a small hit in the special figure 2 is not interrupted, a stage change effect is performed, but a certain SP reach is executed and it is out of alignment. In such a case, if the special figure 2 is a small hit and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the effect is given for a while, but the stage change effect may not be accompanied. In addition, when a certain SP reach with high jackpot reliability is executed and is missed, when a small hit occurs in special figure 2 and the variable display of special figure 1 is interrupted, a stage change effect is accompanied. You may be made to perform the production.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 this time is accompanied by SP reach (step S633; No), it is set so that the normal make-up effect is performed as the make-up effect. Step S637).

  After that, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the continuous notice flag is set (step S639). When the CPU 404 does not determine that the flag for continuous notice is set (step S639; No), it clears the prefetch flag (step S641) and then ends the notice effect determination process. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the continuous preliminary announcement flag is set (step S639; Yes), the preliminary announcement determination process is ended without executing the process of step S641.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the execution of SP reach is prefetched (that is, when the selection of a specific variable time is prefetched), the continuous lottery production execution lottery and the setting suggestion production execution lottery are performed. However, with regard to the setting suggestive effect, the execution lottery may be performed even when it is prefetched that the other variable time is selected, and the setting suggestive effect is executed regardless of the result of the prefetching. You may make it a lottery.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect is performed when the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect is not won, but the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect and the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect are separately performed. It may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the history of execution of the continuous notice effect and the history of execution of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed by operating the operation key unit 190 in the standby state, for example. In this case, the history of execution of the continuous announcement and the history of execution of the setting suggestion effect may not be distinguished, and for example, may be displayed as the history of appearance of the chance. Further, the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed or the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed may be displayed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect and the setting suggestion effect is performed by using the tables shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B. By doing so, the appearance rate of the continuous announcement effect and the setting suggestion effect may be changeable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery for the continuous announcement effect is performed even when the execution of the outlying SP reach is prefetched, but the execution lottery for the continuous announcement effect is performed only when the execution of the big hit SP reach is prefetched. You may do it. According to this, since the continuous advance notice effect is surely a big hit, the expectation for the big hit is further increased, while if the chance eyes do not appear continuously, it is a setting suggestion effect. It may be understood that the game can be made more interesting. In addition, during the period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the period from power-on to 50 rotations), the continuous advance notice effect is provided both when the execution of the big hit SP reach is pre-read and when the execution of the outlying SP reach is pre-read. In the execution lottery, during a period other than the period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, a period exceeding 50 rotations after the power is turned on), the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect is performed only when the execution of the big hit SP reach is prefetched. In the period in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the continuous notice effect may be executed so that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the execution of the jackpot SP reach is prefetched and the continuous lottery effect execution lottery is missed, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery is performed. Therefore, in the period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display of the symbols is executed 50 times, even when the chance eye is displayed due to the setting suggestion, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed accidentally. There is. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion effect is executed, it may be possible to give an expectation of a big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is suppressed from being continuously executed, but may be continuously executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect in the next symbol variation display in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, the continuous notice effect is performed from the next symbol variation display in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. Although it will be executed, execution of the continuous notice effect may be suppressed in the next symbol variation display after the setting suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the prefetch flag is present and a small hit occurs in the special map 2, the preliminary read-ahead notice effect may be executed for a while, but even if the preliminary read-ahead notice effect is not performed, Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed during the small hit type, but the pre-reading notice effect may be executed during the same content regardless of the small hit type. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the contents of the staging effect are made different depending on whether or not the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach. , The content of the staging effect may be the same regardless of whether or not SP reach is performed.

  Next, the initial big hit time suggestive effect selection processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating the suggestion effect selection processing during the first big hit. The initial big hit time suggestive effect selection process is a process executed in the normal game state when a special figure fluctuation start command indicating that the symbol fluctuation display for the big hit is started is received from the main control unit 300, for example. is there.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 reads out the current setting value stored in the RAM 408 (step S701).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the big hit is a probability variation big hit (step S703). When the CPU 404 determines that it is the probability variation big hit, the CPU 404 refers to the initial probability variation big hit re-lottery setting suggestion production selection table shown in FIG. 18D stored in the ROM 406 (step S705). On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the big hit is the probability variation big hit, the CPU 404 refers to the first normal big hit re-lottery setting suggestion effect selection table stored in the ROM 406 shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 selects a field used for the lottery from the referenced table and the current setting value read from the RAM 408, and determines the combination of the decorative pattern before the re-changing and the combination of the decorative pattern after the re-changing, the stop decorative pattern. The determination process is executed (step S709). More specifically, when the result of the symbol variation display this time is a normal big hit (for example, a big hit in "Special drawing A"), the initial normal big hit re-lottery setting suggestion production selection table in FIG. If any of the settings 1 to 3 is referred to, the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 100%, and the "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration" From 0-decoration 0 "(excluding" decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "), any combination of jackpot decorative patterns is selected.

  If it is the setting 4, the combination of the big hit decorative designs is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 90%, and the combination of the big hit decorative patterns is changed before and after the re-lottery with a probability of 10%. That is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration". 8-decoration 8 "is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is changed to" decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ". This may suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or greater.

  If it is the setting 5, the combination of the big hit decorative patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 70%, and the combination of the big hit decorative patterns is changed before and after the re-lottery with a probability of 20%, that is, The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration". While selecting one from "8", the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern after the re-lottery is set to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" and the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is changed before and after the re-lottery with a probability of 5%. That is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-drawing is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", "decoration 6-" One of "decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8" Along with the selection, the combination of the jackpot decorative designs after the re-lottery is set to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", and the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is changed before and after the re-lottery with a probability of 5%, that is, before the re-lottery. The combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is selected from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9", and the combination of jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is "decoration 5- Decorative 5-decoration 5 ". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more.

  Further, if the setting is 6, there is a 50% probability that the combination of big hit decorative patterns will not be changed before and after the re-variation, and there will be a 36% chance that the combination of big hit decorative patterns will be changed before and after the re-lottery. The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration". While selecting one from "8", the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", and the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is changed before and after the re-lottery with a probability of 7%. That is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-drawing is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", "decoration 6-" One of "decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8" Along with the selection, the combination of the jackpot decorative designs after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", and the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is changed before and after the re-lottery with a probability of 7%, that is, before the re-lottery. The combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is selected from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9", and the combination of jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is "decoration 5- Decorative 5-decoration 5 ". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more. It should be noted that there may be a case where an effect capable of suggesting that the setting is 6 is executed before and after the re-lottery.

  Further, when the result of the symbol variation display this time is a probability variation big hit (for example, a big hit in "special figure B"), the setting probability production selection table at the time of the first probability variation big hit re-lottery in FIG. 18D is referred to and set. In the case of any of 1 to 3, there is a 70% probability that the combination of the big hit decorative patterns is not changed before and after the re-change, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" (Excluding "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"), any combination of jackpot decorative patterns is selected. In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or during the big hit end effect, an effect of notifying that the state will change to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game may be performed. Also, with a probability of 5%, the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is not changed before and after the re-change, and the combination of the decorative pattern of the jackpot from "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" Select. In addition, with a probability of 25%, the combination of the jackpot decorative designs is changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0". -Decoration 0 "(excluding" decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ") and a combination of any of the jackpot decorative patterns, and jackpot decoration after re-lottery The combination of patterns is set to "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". As a result, there is a case in which it is possible to notify that the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits is seen and that the big hit game is to shift to the probability change state after the end of the game.

  With setting 4, there is a 60% probability that the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is not changed before and after the re-change, and “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” (“decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "), and select any combination of jackpot decorative patterns. In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or during the big hit end effect, an effect of notifying that the state will change to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game may be performed. Also, with a probability of 5%, the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is not changed before and after the re-change, and the combination of the decorative pattern of the jackpot from "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" Select. In addition, with a probability of 25%, the combination of the jackpot decorative designs is changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0". -Decoration 0 "(excluding" decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ") and a combination of any of the jackpot decorative patterns, and jackpot decoration after re-lottery The combination of patterns is set to "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, with a probability of 2%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 "are selected, and a combination of jackpot decorative patterns after re-lottery is selected as" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decorate to 4 ". Also, with a probability of 8%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 5-decoration 5 One of "decoration 5" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9" is selected, and the combination of jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". In the present embodiment, by changing the combination of the big hit decorative pattern by the odd number before and after the re-lottery to the combination of the big hit decorative pattern by the even number, by performing a seemingly contradictory effect of the appearance rank down, it becomes a probable state after the big hit game. It may be possible to further increase the expectations of transition. In addition, when the combination of the jackpot decorative design from the odd number design to the even number design is changed before and after the re-lottery effect, the setting suggestion may be always included. Further, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is different, and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols after the re-lottery is "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", so that the player has a setting of 4 or more. It may be possible to suggest that.

  Further, in the case of setting 5, there is a 40% probability that the combination of the big hit decorative patterns is not changed before and after the re-change, and “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” ( (Except for "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"), any combination of jackpot decorative patterns is selected. In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or during the big hit end effect, an effect of notifying that the state will change to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game may be performed. Also, with a probability of 5%, the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is not changed before and after the re-change, and the combination of the decorative pattern of the jackpot from "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" Select. In addition, with a probability of 25%, the combination of the jackpot decorative designs is changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0". -Decoration 0 "(excluding" decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ") and a combination of any of the jackpot decorative patterns, and jackpot decoration after re-lottery The combination of patterns is set to "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Also, with a probability of 4%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 "are selected, and a combination of jackpot decorative patterns after re-lottery is selected as" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decorate to 4 ". In addition, with a probability of 16%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 5-decoration 5". One of "decoration 5" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9" is selected, and the combination of jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". Also, with a probability of 5%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 ", and a jackpot after re-lottery The combination of decorative patterns is "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Also, with a probability of 5%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9". -Any one is selected from "decoration 9", and the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more.

  Further, if the setting is 6, there is a 20% probability that the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is not changed before and after the re-changing, and “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” ( (Except for "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"), any combination of jackpot decorative patterns is selected. In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or during the big hit end effect, an effect of notifying that the state will change to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game may be performed. Also, with a probability of 5%, the combination of the jackpot decorative pattern is not changed before and after the re-change, and the combination of the decorative pattern of the jackpot from "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" Select. In addition, with a probability of 25%, the combination of the jackpot decorative designs is changed before and after the re-lottery, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0". -Decoration 0 "(excluding" decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ") and a combination of any of the jackpot decorative patterns, and jackpot decoration after re-lottery The combination of patterns is set to "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the combination of jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 6%, that is, the combination of jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 "are selected, and a combination of jackpot decorative patterns after re-lottery is selected as" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decorate to 4 ". Also, with a probability of 30%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 5-decoration 5". One of "decoration 5" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9" is selected, and the combination of jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". Also, with a probability of 7%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2". -Decoration 2 "," decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 ", and a jackpot after re-lottery The combination of decorative patterns is "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Also, with a probability of 7%, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed, that is, the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9". -Any one is selected from "decoration 9", and the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more. It should be noted that there may be a case where an effect capable of suggesting that the setting is 6 is executed before and after the re-lottery.

  When the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery is determined by using the table in the stop decorative symbol determination process as described above, the CPU 404 stops after the jackpot decorative symbol and the re-lottery that stop before the re-lottery. The jackpot decorative design is data-set so as to be a combination of the determined jackpot decorative designs (step S711).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 reads out the payout number setting suggestive effect selection table corresponding to the current setting value read from the RAM 408 (step S713). Specifically, if the current setting value is “4”, the CPU 404 reads the setting 4 payout number setting suggesting effect selection table shown in FIG. 19A, and the current setting value is “5”. If there is, the setting 5 payout number setting suggestion production selection table shown in FIG. 19B is read out, and if the current setting value is “6”, the setting 6 payout number setting shown in FIG. 19C is set. The suggestion effect selection table is read. Normally, when a number of sharpness per 2500 (number of perforations) such as “2500pt” or “5000pt” is counted, a “perforated number display image” described later in which the display mode is changed is displayed ( For example, by enlarging and displaying the display of the total number of winning prize balls), the player is informed of that fact. However, in the present embodiment, in addition to the drill number display image displayed by the drill number, The display mode may be changed when a number other than the number of drills (for example, a number such as “4560” or “5550”) is changed by using the above-mentioned payout number setting suggestion effect selection table. By making such a display, it is suggested that the setting is high.

  Here, the contents of the payout number setting suggestive effect selection table will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 19A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the set number of coins setting suggestion effect production table for setting 4, and FIG. 19B is the content of the set number of coins set suggestion effect production table for setting 5. It is a figure showing an example, and the figure (c) is a figure showing an example of the contents of the set number of coins setup suggestion production selection table for setting 6. In addition, although the payout number setting suggestive effect selection table corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 is not prepared, it may be prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the setting 4 output number suggestion production table does not make a high setting suggestion by the display mode of the total number of coins with a probability of 70%, and has a probability of 10% with the total number of coins output. Change the display mode of the total payout number when the number is "4440", and change the display mode of the total payout number when the total payout number is "4560" with a probability of 10%. Then, with a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total payout number is changed both when the total payout number is “4440” and when it is “4560”. As a result, the player may feel a sense of discomfort at the timing of the change in the display mode of the total payout number during the big hit game, and may have an expectation for a high setting (setting 4 or more).

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the setting number output suggestion production table for setting 5 does not make a high setting suggestion by the display mode of the total number of coins with a probability of 50%, and has a probability of 10% with the total number of coins output. Change the display mode of the total payout number when the number is "4440", and change the display mode of the total payout number when the total payout number is "4560" with a probability of 10%. With a 10% probability, the display mode of the total payout number is changed both when the total payout number is "4440" and when it is "4560", and there is a 5% probability that the total payout number is The display mode of the total payout number is changed both when the number is “4440” and when it is “5550”, and when the total payout number is “4560” with a probability of 5%, and Total output in both cases of "5600" To vary the number of display modes. As a result, the player may feel discomfort at the timing of the change in the display mode of the total payout number during the big hit game, and may have an expectation for a high setting (setting 4 or more, or setting 5 or more). ..

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), the setting 6 payout number setting suggestion production selection table does not perform a high setting suggestion based on the display mode of the total payout number with a probability of 30%, and has a probability of 20% with a total payout number. Change the display mode of the total payout number when the number is "4440", and change the display mode of the total payout number when the total payout number is "5550" with a probability of 10%. With a 10% probability, the display mode of the total payout number is changed both when the total payout number is "4440" and when it is "5550", and there is a 15% probability that the total payout number is When the number is "6660", the display mode of the total payout number is changed, and when the total payout number is "7777", the display mode of the total payout number is changed with a probability of 15%. To As a result, the player feels uncomfortable with the timing of the change in the display mode of the total payout number during the big hit game, and can expect the high setting (setting 4 or more, setting 5 or more, or setting 6). There are cases.

  As described above, the CPU 404 determines the change pattern of the display mode of the total payout number using the payout number setting suggestion production selection table corresponding to the current setting value, and the display mode of the total payout number with the determined change pattern. Is set so as to change (step S715), the initial big hit time suggestive effect selection processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the high setting suggestion is set by setting different appearance rates by referring to different tables for each setting. Alternatively, the high setting may make the high setting suggestion more likely to appear, or conversely, the higher setting may make the high setting suggestion less likely to appear. In particular, even if the appearance rate is the same regardless of the setting, the jackpot probability is different between the settings in the first place, and thus the appearance rate may be naturally different. Alternatively, since the setting suggestion does not actually make a false effect, for example, if the setting is 1, the appearance rate is 0%, and the appearance rate of the high setting suggestion is naturally set. It can be said that it changes by the difference. It goes without saying that this can be applied to the setting suggestive effects described so far, and can be applied to the setting suggestive effects described below.

  Next, referring to FIG. 20, in each symbol display device (first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208) in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above. An example of the operation will be described. Here, FIG. 20 (a) is a timing chart explaining an example of the operation in each symbol display device when the variation of the special figure 1 starts during the small hit game in the normal game state, and FIG. 20 (b). Is a timing chart explaining an example of an operation in each symbol display device when a small hit occurs in a normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display that is a small hit is displayed, but in the special figure 1, it is in the standby state. Further, since it is in the normal game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable display of the decorative symbol, but is displayed in the standby state. After that, at the timing of t61, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol. At the timing of t62 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 has passed, the small hit game is started. Then, during the small hitting game, when the game ball enters the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 at the timing of t63, after performing a lottery or the like whether or not to make a big hit, the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 Although the display is started, since the small hit game related to the small hit in the special figure 2 is being started, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, but the display is immediately suspended. After that, when the small hit game ends at the timing of t64, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted is restarted (substantially started). After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the original symbol variation time of the special figure 1 is approached, the fluctuation variation is started with a combination of deviating decorative symbols, and then the staging effect is started at the timing of t65. . After that, at the timing of t66, when the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the off symbol, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed with the off symbol. At the same time, the production is finished, and the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns that are out of alignment. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and comes to the timing of t67, the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 for which the symbol variable display is suspended is digested, and the special figure 1 of The variable display of symbols is started. In addition, in addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Similarly, before the symbol fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) of special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts shaking fluctuation display with a combination of decorative symbols that are out of sync with the timing of t68. While the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a detached symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the detached decorative symbols that are displayed due to the fluctuation. After that, similarly, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t69 comes, the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state, there is a game property that recommends left-handed play. Therefore, when the right hit is detected in the normal game state (for example, the passage of the game ball to the big hit occurrence gate 252 is detected), for example, a warning display for prompting the left hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, in the small hitting game state, it is not possible to give a profit to the player unless the player hits the ball to the right. Therefore, a display prompting the player to hit the right is displayed even for a short time. In such a case, if a warning display prompting the player to left-handed is displayed immediately after the small hitting game state ends, the player's willingness to play may decrease. In the present embodiment, after the small hitting game is finished, the display that urges left-handedness is not performed for a certain period (for example, 30 seconds). This period (the period indicated by t64 to t70) may be referred to as the "left-handed warning suppression period". In this way, in this embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, the right hitting is performed and the state continues, and the left hitting warning suppression period elapses even if the symbol variation display is started a plurality of times. Until then, the warning that encourages left-handedness is not issued.

  In addition, in this example of performance, when a game ball wins in the special opening 1 starting opening (upper) 230 during the small hit game related to the small hit in the special drawing 2, the symbol fluctuation of the special drawing 1 starts and the progress is interrupted. On the other hand, while the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol may not be started until the small hit game ends. In this case, the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponds to the symbol variation time of Toku-zu 1, and the effect may not be executed for a while. Alternatively, an effect other than the time-stamping effect may be executed.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 20 (b), the variable display of symbols is performed in both special figure 1 and special figure 2, and the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the normal gaming state, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed according to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. After that, before the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol at the timing of t71. At this time, the progress of Toku-zu 1 which is being variably displayed is temporarily suspended, and the suspension period is started. However, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the variable display of the decorative symbol, although the progress of the symbol variable time of the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped. As a result, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended. After that, when the symbol display time of special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t72 comes, the small hit game is started. After that, although the special symbol 1 is in the interruption period, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is continuing, so that it may shift to SP reach at the timing of t73. That is, it can be said that a situation in which the SP reach effect is being performed during the small hit game can occur. Then, when the small hit game ends at the timing of t74, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted is restarted. Since the leftward warning suppression period is a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, a period indicated by t74 to t75) from the timing of t74, even if the rightward is continuously performed, as long as it is within the period. , There is no warning to the left. When the right-handed stroke is performed even though the left-handedness warning suppression period has elapsed at the timing of t75, a warning that prompts the left-handed stroke is issued. As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, when a long symbol variation time such as SP reach is selected, the small hit of the special symbol 2 is displayed during the symbol variation display according to the special symbol 1 being executed. Even if it occurs, it can be said that there is a case where a warning to urge left-handing is given during the symbol variation display of the special map 1.

  Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 21 shows a decorative pattern display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the general figure hold lamp 216 are omitted. ing.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21A, a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display area, and a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the large decorative symbol displayed in the center of the display screen.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol) and also for notifying the number of holdings, and the holding of the special figure 1 is on the upper left of the display area. The number display area is provided, and the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, in the upper right of the display area, the symbol variation notification area of special figure 1 is provided, and in the lower right, the symbol variation notification area of special figure 2 is provided. It should be noted that a symbol variation notification area for a general figure and a holding number display area for a general figure may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 is matched with the reserved number shown by the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 is the special figure 2 hold lamp 220. It is consistent with the number of holdings indicated by. Further, in the symbol fluctuation notification area of the special figure 1, while the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, a big hit is displayed as "○", and a small hit is "△". Is stopped and displayed, and if it is out, it is stopped and displayed with "x". In addition, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the symbol changing display area of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the symbol changing display area of the special figure 1, and this is a display mode corresponding to the symbol changing display and the stop display of the special figure 2. Changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, blink mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the number-of-holds display area, a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed is given. You can go.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, although the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the number of the holding number display area of the special figure 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 or the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 21A, the two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and both of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figure 1 are displayed. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 21A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) as described above, the variation display time of special figure 2 is almost always ( This is because if it is out of alignment or if it is a small hit), it is extremely long (for example, 580 seconds), and winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 does not make much sense.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the holding icon display area of the special map which is easier to display the display result in the special maps 1 and 2 is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is the normal game state or the electric support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), the display result of special figure 1 is easily displayed as described above. As shown in FIG. 21A, when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d and the control state is the probable state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). On the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be the same or different. ..

  In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbol is performed in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device → the variation display start of the fourth symbol → the start animation animation of the hold icon or the deletion → the variation symbol start of the decorative symbol. However, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is further performed, No changes have been made to the hold icons and decorative designs.

  In FIG. 21 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 has started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon located at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

  In FIG. 21D, the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 21E, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation, reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. At the time when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or until that time, the second hold icon. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21G, an operation promotion notification image 136P that urges the production button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 or the like. . Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 21 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 21 (i), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display “Chance is!” Is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 21 (k), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, and the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but it is also possible to always enter.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 21 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 21 (n). , SP (Special) reach (swordsman reach) has been developed. An image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (n), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (o), the main character and the enemy swordsman duel. An animation of the scene is displayed.

  The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development to SP reach.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

  In FIG. 22 (p) continuing from FIG. 21 (o), the duel scene animation continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 22 (s). In FIG. 22 (s), the main character wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 22 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the conventional one may be displayed. Alternatively, a setting suggestion display may be displayed in this scene. Eventually, as shown in (u) of the same figure, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be a non-displayed background image or a background image different from before. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. It should be noted that the mini symbols are continuously variably displayed for all the symbols until the symbols are fixedly displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (v), the decorative pattern starts changing display again together with the display of the character "re-lottery !!", and the re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, it is a big hit and after the big hit game, it is decided that a transition to a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player is decided. It is expected that the combination of the decoration pattern of the decoration 7-decoration 7 "will be finally displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (w), the combination of the decorative patterns is the combination of the big hit of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" and the definite variation big hit of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed. It is shown that a combination of decorative patterns indicating that is displayed. At this time, an effect display EF1 in which a star flashes is displayed around the decorative pattern after the stop, and notifies that the combination of so-called stopped jackpot decorative patterns has been ranked up.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (x), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" which are confirmed to be 6R certainty variation jackpots is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 22 (x) is stopped and displayed with "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of "777". In FIG. 22 (x), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 22 (y), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "big chance big hit" is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit, and a character of "right hit me!" Is displayed. I'm pushing for a right hit. In the big hit game start effect shown in FIG. 22 (y), a display including a setting suggestion may be displayed. In this case, only when a big hit that meets some condition (for example, only when the first big hit after the power is turned on and only when a big hit of 5 consecutive chans or more occurs, out of a plurality of big hits with different payouts) The display including the setting suggestion may be displayed only in a big hit with the largest number of balls (for example, only when the big hit is 10R).

  On the other hand, on the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 22 (v), for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (w ′) to FIG. 22 (y ′), when the combination of the re-lottery and the decorative symbol does not change. There is. That is, there may be a case where the re-lottery has failed. However, in the present embodiment, even when the stop display is not performed with the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the probability variation big hit is confirmed, for example, it is possible to give an expectation to the promotion effect in the big hit effect, so that the player In some cases, expectations can be sustained.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the mode of the re-lottery effect is one type, but there are a plurality of types of modes, and the degree to which the combination of the decorative symbols of the jackpot changes before and after the re-lottery varies depending on the mode of the re-lottery effect that is executed. It may be changed, for example, re-lottery effect in a mode involving movement of a role product> re-lottery effect by symbol fluctuation display by frame advance> re-lottery effect by high-speed fluctuation> re-lottery effect by slow fluctuation The expectation that the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits may change before and after the lottery may be set high. The order and mode of the degree of expectation are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect in the big hit game centering on the decorative symbol display device. 23, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220. , And the universal figure holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (a), after the 6R probability variation big hit (it is difficult to determine whether it is a normal big hit or the probability variation big hit in the production) in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. The state of transition to the first round is shown. When the process moves to the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "Congratulations!" Along with the character of Ms. Machiko on the slightly left side of the center of the display screen to celebrate the big hit. In addition, when it is confirmed that it is a probability variation big hit by the combination of the decorative patterns at the time of big hit (for example, when it becomes a big hit by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"), As shown in FIG. 23 (a ′), the letters “Congratulations!” Are displayed in place of the letters “Congratulations!” To give a sense of expectation for winning a large number of coins. Then, the number of hits from the first big hit (including small hits; sometimes referred to as "continuous chan number display") is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the big hit decoration at the time of a big hit is displayed in the upper left corner. The symbol "decoration 4" is displayed. Also, in the upper center of the display screen, the current round number "1R" is displayed as the number of rounds, and below that, the number of prize balls obtained in this big hit game and the big hit game this time are obtained. “32/480 get!” That indicates the expected number of prize balls is displayed. That is, since the game balls of four balls have entered the first variable winning port 234a since the big hit this time, the notification of the winning of the number of prize balls of 32 balls is made, and at the time of the big hit of 480 balls of the prize balls, It has been shown that acquisition can be expected. Also, the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit is displayed at the lower right of the display screen, and this number ends the number of prize balls won in the big hit and the small hit (big hit, small hit). It is added (counted up) every time. Therefore, during the big hit game related to the first big hit, the total number of winning prize balls is not counted up and remains "0pt" until the big hit ends. It should be noted that each time a winning ball is won, the number may be added to the total number of winning balls. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of award balls generated by winning in the variable winning openings (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a) is added, but to other winning openings. The number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize may be added, for example, by further adding the number of prize balls acquired by winning a specific general winning opening that can be won by right-handing. You may

  FIG. 23B shows a state where the game of the third round is being played. In the present embodiment, the jackpot is obtained by the combination of the jackpot patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", so it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot. Therefore, in the third round, promotion effect is performed to notify whether or not the big hit is the probability variation big hit. When the promotion effect is started, the character "promotion opportunity!" Is displayed in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, so as to give the player a sense of expectation that the probability will be a big hit. The promotion effect may not be performed, the promotion effect may or may not be performed, and the promotion effect may be necessarily performed. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation is a big hit by the combination of the decorative patterns at the time of the big hit, the promotion effect is not performed, but the promotion effect may be performed. The setting suggestion may be included.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 23C, it is shown that the result of the promotion effect is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 23 (c), it is shown that the promotion production has succeeded, and the characters "promotion!" "Next small hit RUSH rush" are displayed in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, It is reported that the big hit this time is a definite strange big hit. On the other hand, when the promotion effect has failed, the character "sorry ..." is displayed as shown in FIG. 23 (c '). It should be noted that if the promotion effect fails, it may be possible to notify that it is a normal big hit, or by making other promotion effects (for example, reversing effect at the ending etc.) have expectation, it is still a sudden change. You may not reveal whether it is a big hit. In the timing shown in FIG. 23 (c), it is the third round, and it is shown that 22 game balls have entered the first variable winning port 234a and 176 award balls have been won. There is.

  FIG. 23D shows a state in which the big hit end effect is being performed after the sixth round is completed. Note that the example shown in FIG. 23D shows a state in which an effect that is determined to be a probability variation big hit is being performed. When the big hit end effect is started, the character "small hit RUSH rush!" Is displayed in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). Also, an animation is started in which the display of the total number of awarded balls displayed at the lower right of the display screen is started, and the addition of the 480 award balls won in the big hit this time is shown. . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a normal big hit, the characters "big hit end" and "time saving plunge!" Are displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 23 (d '). It is displayed, and it is informed that the electric power support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state) is entered. It should be noted that the display showing the total number of awarded prize balls is incremented even when the state shifts to the electric support state, similarly to the case of transition to the probability change state, and the display of the total number of awarded prize balls after the count-up is displayed. , Is continuously displayed until the electric support state ends, but in the case of a normal big hit, the total number of won prize balls may not be displayed.

  It should be noted that it is possible to change the degree of expectation of success in promotion production during the big hit game by changing the combination of the decoration patterns of the big hit when it becomes the big hit, for example, the big hit in "decoration 3" or "decoration 7" ( Probability change confirmation >> jackpot in odd symbols other than “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”> jackpot in even symbols may be promoted in order of success.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect in the probability variation game state centering on the decorative symbol display device. 24, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220. , And the universal figure holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  FIG. 24 (a) shows that the big hit game related to the first big hit is finished, and the first variation display of the symbols is started after the probability change state. In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation machine capable of displaying the symbol variation display simultaneously in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so when the big hit game ends, the special figure Both the symbol variation display of 1 and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 will start substantially at the same time. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 2.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (a), the characters of "small hit RUSH rush!" Which were displayed in the big hit game end effect are continuously displayed, and the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. On the left side of the figure, it is shown that the decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, an animation of counting up the number of prize balls (480) obtained in the big hit game relating to the first big hit is continuously performed. In the upper left, a mini design and a right-handed display for instructing right-handedness are displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 24 is a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the probability changing state is provided with the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, although the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 2 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holding figures display area of special figure 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of the hold icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 24A, three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of the special map 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special map 2, and these three hold icons h21, h22 of the special map 1, All h23 are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 24A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of special figure 1. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 24 is a probable variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), special character 2 start port 232 is made to win, This is because many variable displays in FIG. 2 are executed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (b) shows a state when the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 is finished after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 24 (b), in the present embodiment, after the big hit game is finished, until the four symbol variation display of special figure 2 is finished, the "small hit RUSH rush" displayed in the big hit game end effect is displayed. The character "!" Is continuously displayed to give the appearance of a smooth transition to the probability change state after the jackpot game is over. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (b), the special map 2 is displayed as a result of the deviation, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display screen is also displayed as "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration". It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of 1 ". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "441". It should be noted that the special figure 1 is continuously displayed in variable display. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (b), the count-up animation in the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen has ended, and the player has won the jackpot game related to the first jackpot. “0480pt” indicating the number of prize balls is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (c), it is shown that the big hit game is over and the fourth symbol variable display of special figure 2 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (c), there is no symbol variation display that is suspended in the special figure 1 (that is, suspension 0), and it is stopped and displayed as a result of the deviation. In addition, in the special figure 2, there is no symbol fluctuation display which is suspended (that is, suspension 0). At the time of right hitting, it is easier to win the second special figure starting port 242, so after the fourth variation of the special figure 2 symbol variation display is started, for example, four game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 242. In some cases, when a player enters a ball and four special maps 2 are reserved as shown in FIG. 24 (d). That is, in FIG. 24D, the four symbol variable displays of the special figure 2 are reserved, and the four reserved icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (e), it is shown that the big hit game is over and the fourth symbol variable display of special figure 2 is over. As shown in FIG. 24 (e), the characters "small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed in the big hit game end effect are still displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (e), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of being out of alignment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also "decoration 9-decoration 6-decoration" accordingly. It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of position 2 ”. Also, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "962".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (f), it is shown that the big hit game has ended and the fifth variable display of the special diagram 2 has started. After the big hit game is over, when the fifth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, the character "small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed from the big hit game end effect is erased, and the small hit RUSH is in progress (that is, the probability change state). The character "small hit RUSH medium" indicating "middle" is displayed above the display of the total number of awarded prize balls. Further, it is shown that the decorative pattern, which is displayed small in the upper right part of the display screen, moves to the center of the display screen and is enlarged to the size normally displayed. In the present embodiment, this may make it possible to give a feeling of expectation to the pending consecutive chan. After that, until the big hit or the small hit, it is displayed in the same manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (g), after the big hit game is finished, it is shown that the fifth symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is finished. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (g), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of being out of alignment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also “decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8” in accordance with this. It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of sync. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (h), it is shown that the symbol variable display of special figure 2 which is a small hit is being performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, instead of displaying "small hit RUSH in progress", the character "chance!" Is displayed to announce that a win (small hit or big hit) will occur. The character "chance!" May not be displayed, the character "chance!" May not be displayed, and "chance!" The character "" may be displayed without fail.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (i), the small hitting pattern (“special figure g”) is stopped and displayed, and in accordance with this, the combination of decorative patterns “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "666" in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative design. In the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, in the symbol variation notification area of the special figure 2, “Δ” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has been achieved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (j), the state that the small hit game has started is shown. When the small hit game starts, the word "SMALL bonus!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen to inform that the small hit game (or the 3R big hit game that looks like the small hit game) is being performed. The display of the number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen is updated to "second time" to notify that it is the second consecutive chan. Also, in the upper left of the display screen, "decoration 6", which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit occurs, is displayed, and the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed. Has been done.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (k), one game ball enters the second variable winning port 235a by short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a, and 15 prize balls are acquired. The character "15/150 get!" Indicating that 150 prize balls can be expected to be won in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, no addition is made to the display of the total number of awarded prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l), a state in which the small hitting game is finished by the entry of ten game balls into the second variable winning port 235a is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the characters “150/150 get!” Indicating that 150 prize balls can be expected to be obtained in this small hit are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Even at this point, no addition is made to the display of the total number of awarded balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen.

  After that, when the small hitting game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 24 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probability variation state continues. The characters "RUSH RUSH CONTINUE!" Are displayed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size and moves to the upper right portion of the display screen to start the variable display. Also, it is shown that the animation of the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is started to count up, and 150 prize balls obtained in the small hit game are added. . As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls obtained during the small hit game is not added during the small hit game, and is added after the symbol variation display after the small hit game is started is started. ing. This may allow the player to concentrate on the game.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (n) shows a state when the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 is finished after the end of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 24 (n), in the present embodiment, even after the small hitting game (or the big hitting game) is finished, the "small hitting RUSH continuation! By continuously displaying the character "" and counting up the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game (big hit game) to the display of the total number of won prize balls, after the small hit game is over The production is performed to make it look like a smooth transition to the probability change state. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (n), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of being out of alignment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also displayed as "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration". It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of 8 ". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "718".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (o), it is shown that the small hit has ended and the second variable display of the special figure 2 is being performed. Even at this timing, the animation in which the display of the total number of awarded balls is counted up continues. Then, after that, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (p), the animation of the count-up of the display of the total number of the winning prize balls is finished, and the number of 150 prize balls obtained during the small hit game from “0480pt” before the small hit is increased. It is added and updated to "0630pt".

  Next, the first setting suggestive effect as an example of the high setting suggesting effect displayed with at least the detection of the out-ball as a condition will be described with reference to FIG. 25. Here, FIG. 25 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the setting suggestion effect centering on the decorative pattern display device. This effect is a setting suggestion effect executed based on the first setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG.

  The example productions shown in FIGS. 25 (1a) to 25 (1e) show that the first setting suggestion production is performed in the normal game state. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (1a), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (1b), a point gauge PTG is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen, and the word “Chance with Gauge MAX” is displayed, giving the feeling that the setting suggestion may be made. It may be possible to have it. After that, each time the game ball passes through the out-ball detection sensor SWout, for example, 1 point is counted, and by winning the first starting winning opening (upper) 230, for example, 5 points are counted and the point is updated. It is shown that the gauge increases as it is done. After that, when a predetermined number of points (for example, 3000 pt) are accumulated, as shown in FIG. 25 (1d), the gauge in the point gauge PTG is full, and then, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), In the lower right portion, a Gol-grandpa character GLG that smokes a cigarette appears along with the characters "high setting!", Which suggests that "high setting!". In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestive effect may be performed when the number is 4 or more, but the first setting suggesting effect may be performed when the setting is 2 or more or the setting 3 or more. Good. Further, in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is not set, the point gauge may not be displayed, or the point gauge may be displayed, but the first setting suggestion effect is not performed. You may Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening and the out-ball detecting sensor SWout is not limited to the above-mentioned points and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a winning opening to which points are added and a winning opening to which points are not added, or points may be added every time all winning openings are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points will be added to which winning port. The point gauge PTG may be always displayed, or may be started to be displayed when the points are almost full. Further, the points may be indicated by numerical values instead of gauges. In this case, the numerical value may be displayed all the time, or may be displayed only when the number of points is sharp (for example, 1000 points).

  The example productions shown in FIGS. 25 (2a) to 25 (2b) show that the first setting suggestion production is performed in the jackpot gaming state. In this example of performance, in the big hit game state, for example, when a predetermined number of points have accumulated. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (2a), it is shown that the big-hit game started with a probability variation big-hit. After that, for example, each time the game ball passes through the out-ball detection sensor SWout, for example, 1 point is counted, and each time the game ball passes through the first variable winning port 234a, for example, 20 points are counted. Each time the game ball passes through the 2 special figure starting port 232, for example, 10 points are counted, and when the number of points reaches a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 25 (2b), the GOL grandpa character GLG during the big hit game. There is a case where the first setting suggestion effect in which is appears is performed and suggests that the setting is high. The point gauge PTG may be displayed when the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the big hit game. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening and the out-ball detecting sensor SWout is not limited to the above-mentioned points and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a winning opening to which points are added and a winning opening to which points are not added, or points may be added every time all winning openings are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points will be added to which winning port. Further, in the big hit game state, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (3a) to (3b) show that the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the probabilistic state. In this production example, even in the probability changing state, for example, when a predetermined number of points have accumulated. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (3a), the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed, and the character "small hit RUSH medium" indicating that it is in the probability changing state is on the right side of the display screen. It is displayed in the lower part. After that, when points are added to reach a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 25 (3b), the first setting suggestion effect in which the Gol grandpa character GLG appears in the probable state is performed, and it is suggested that the setting is high. There is a case. Note that the point gauge PTG may be displayed when the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the probability change state. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening and the out-ball detecting sensor SWout is not limited to the above-mentioned points and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a winning opening to which points are added and a winning opening to which points are not added, or points may be added every time all winning openings are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points will be added to which winning port. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the probability changing state.

  25 (4a) to FIG. 25 (4b), the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 are not performed, there is no pending symbol variation display, and the jackpot is shown. It is shown that the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the standby state in which the game state (small hitting game state) is not entered. In this production example, in a customer waiting state (a state where the stop result of the decorative pattern is displayed or a customer waiting demonstration production as shown in FIG. 25 (4a) is performed, for example, the number of points is a predetermined number. Specifically, the decorative design display device 208 shown in Fig. 25 (4a) is performing a customer waiting demonstration production.After that, for example, no winning hole is won, and an out When the number of points reaches a predetermined number due to the game ball passing through the ball detection sensor SWout, as shown in FIG. 25 (4b), the first setting suggestion that the Gol grandpa character GLG appears during execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect In some cases, the above-mentioned point gauge PTG may be displayed when the first setting suggestion effect is performed while the customer is waiting. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points added by passing through the winning opening and the out-ball detecting sensor SWout is not limited to the above-mentioned number and can be set arbitrarily. There may be some winning points for which points are not added, or points may be added every time all winning holes are won. In addition, even in the customer waiting state, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed only while the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed, or the stop display of the decorative pattern may be performed. The first setting suggestion effect may be executed only in the state where is displayed, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the customer waiting state.

  FIG. 25 (5a) to FIG. 25 (5c) show the operation when the execution condition of the first setting suggestive effect is satisfied during SP reach. In this example of performance, when points are accumulated during the SP reach and the execution condition of the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is delayed in order to allow the player to concentrate on the SP reach. There is. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (5a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, SP reach is performed, and it is shown that the lord's character and the swordsman character face each other. At this timing, points are accumulated and execution of the first setting suggestive effect is determined. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (5b), it is shown that the lord's character has won and the decorative pattern is swaying and fluctuating in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". However, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started even at the timing of FIG. 25 (5b), after that, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (5c), the SP reach effect is switched to the default background image, and the decorative pattern is the original size. The first setting suggestion effect in which the Gol grandfather character GLG appears in the state of swinging fluctuation is performed. In this embodiment, by doing so, it may be possible to prevent the problem of being unable to concentrate on the effect because the SP reach effect and the setting suggestion effect are simultaneously performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (5b '), when the character of the lord is defeated and the decorative pattern fluctuates and changes due to a combination of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4", after that, As shown in FIG. 25 (5c ′), the first setting suggestion effect is not started even after the transition from the SP reach effect to the default background image, and as shown in FIG. 25 (5d ′), the next symbol After the variable display is started, the first setting suggesting effect whose start is suspended is started.

  In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach effect is finished so that the SP reach effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed at the same time. The setting suggestion effect may be executed. Further, it goes without saying that the start timing of the first setting suggestion effect executed after the SP reach effect is finished is not limited to the above-described one, and can be started at an arbitrary timing.

  Although the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is delayed during the execution of the SP reach effect, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed during execution of the specific notice effect, the specific look-ahead notice effect, or the specific reach effect. In this case, the start of execution of the setting suggestion effect may be delayed. Further, the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be performed in an overlapping manner without delaying the start of execution of the setting suggestion effect.

  FIG. 26 (1a) shows a state in which a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are simultaneously performed during execution of the jackpot game end effect. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (1a), when the big hit game end effect is started, a sabotani group appears, suggesting that the setting is high. The effect in which the sabotani group appears may be referred to as a second setting suggestion effect. Then, when points are accumulated during the execution of the second setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the Gol grandpa character GLG is displayed in a superimposed manner on the sabotani group, and a plurality of setting suggestion effects are displayed. It is shown that there may be a case where the above is performed at the same time. In the present embodiment, the Gol grandpa character GLG in the first setting suggestion effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the sabotani group in the second setting suggestion effect, but the sabotani group is superposed on the Gol grandpa character GLG. It may be displayed.

  FIG. 26 (2a) to FIG. 26 (2b) are illustrious effect examples that are performed separately from the effect example shown in FIG. 26 (1a), and the second setting suggestion effect is performed during the jackpot game end effect. , In this state, when points are accumulated and the first setting suggesting effect is to be executed, it is avoided to be executed overlapping with the second setting suggesting effect, and after the second setting suggesting effect is finished. It shows a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (2a), when the big hit game end effect is started, a sabotani group may appear, suggesting that the setting is high. In this case, points may be accumulated, and execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be determined. In this case, in the big hit game end effect, the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 26 (2b), when the symbol variation display started after the big hit game is ended, the golf is started. The grandfather character GLG is displayed to show that the first setting suggestion effect is executed. In this way, when the second setting suggestion effect is being executed when the first setting suggestion effect is being executed, the start of the first setting suggestion effect is reserved until the second setting suggestion effect is finished. You may do it.

  FIG. 26 (3a) to FIG. 26 (3d) are views for explaining the menu mode to which the player shifts by operating the operation key unit 190 or the effect button 136 in the standby state. In the present embodiment, the operation key unit 190 and the effect button 136 can be operated not only during the execution of the demonstration effect shown in FIG. 26 (3a) but also in the standby state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The menu mode can be entered, but the menu mode may be entered only while the demonstration effect is being executed.

  For example, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (3a), the menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 26 (3b). On the menu screen, "member registration", "password input", "passcode issue", "volume / luminance setting", and "setting suggestion setting" can be performed. “Member registration” is for registering in a database of customers managed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100. In the "password input", the player's past game history can be registered in the pachinko machine 100 by inputting the two-dimensional code or password downloaded by the player from the manufacturer here. As a result, for example, a notice that does not normally appear may appear, or the reliability of the notice may change. “Issue password” is for displaying the game history in the pachinko machine 100 in a two-dimensional code or a character code at the request of the player. The player can register the game history on the database by capturing an image of the displayed two-dimensional code or character code with a mobile terminal or the like and uploading it to the manufacturer via the Internet. The “volume / luminance setting” is that the player operates the operation key unit 190 to adjust the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 of the pachinko machine 100 and the luminance of the decorative pattern display device 208 and various decorative lamps. can do.

  When the player operates the operation key unit 190 to operate the "setting suggestion setting" at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (3b), the "setting suggestion effect customizing" screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 26 (3c). Transition. On the "Customize setting suggestion effect" screen, the character "Please select the game state in which the launch ball suggestion effect is likely to appear" is displayed, and the game state in which the launch ball suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) is likely to appear is displayed. It is possible to select from any one of the normal game state, the “probability change state”, the “electric support state”, and the “big hit game in progress”. It should be noted that a game state other than this may be selectable. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (3c), the cursor is placed on the item "prone to appear in normal times" and the item is highlighted, so that the first setting suggestive effect is likely to appear in the normal gaming state. It has been set. Two or more items may be selectable, or only one item may be selectable.

  When the game state in which the first setting suggestion effect is likely to be generated is selected as described above, as shown in FIG. 26 (3d), a setting suggestion effect of a type that is likely to appear is selected from a plurality of kinds of setting suggestion effects. You can do it. Specifically, the suggestion is made based on the total number of winning balls from the first big hit, “Indication by the number of coins paid out”, and the suggestion is made by displaying the start number between big hits, which is the number of times the pattern variation is displayed between big hits. One of the following: "I suggest it during the start of the game", "I suggest it in the re-lottery" that suggests the setting in the re-lottery production at the time of big hit, and "I suggest it in the stop pattern" that suggests the setting by the appearance of the combination of decorative patterns in the chance. Alternatively, two or more can be selected. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (3d), it is shown that two suggestion effects of “indication by the number of coins paid out” and “indication by re-lottery” are set to be executable, and other setting suggestion effects appear. It is supposed not to. In the present embodiment, the type of setting suggestive effect that appears is set, but the appearance rate of each of a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects may be set.

  Next, an example of the re-lottery effect executed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 27 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the re-lottery effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 27 (a) shows that the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is that the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" (big hit) fluctuates. . After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the decorative pattern that has been swinging fluctuates at high speed, and when the re-lottery production is successful, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), it is confirmed that the probability variation is a big hit. A combination of 6R probability variation big hit decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" to be notified is derived, and an effect display in which a star flashes to make it easier to recognize that the probability variation big hit is confirmed EF1 is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the probability variation is a big hit. After that, as shown in FIG. 27D, the combination of the decorative patterns of the 6R probability variation jackpot of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. In accordance with this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also displayed as "777", and "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification region of the special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284. It is displayed as a stop and it is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a combination of decorative symbols, which is a big hit but it is not clear whether or not it is a probabilistic big jackpot, is promoted to a combination of decorative symbols that definitely informs that it is a probable big jackpot, an effect display is displayed. The EF1 is displayed so that the user can be recognized that he / she has been promoted.

  On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect fails, as shown in FIG. 27 (c '), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed again, and the swing fluctuation is performed. In this case, the effect display EF1 may be displayed. In the present embodiment, the symbol is not changed in the re-lottery effect, and the effect display EF1 is displayed even when it fails, so that, for example, the promotion effect is always successful during the jackpot game. It is suggested. Thereby, the player may be able to recognize that the probability variation is a big hit. The setting indication may be included by displaying the effect display EF1. After that, when the symbol variation time elapses and the timing of the symbol stop display comes, as shown in FIG. 27 (d '), the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed. In accordance with this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the surface is also displayed as "111", and "○" in the symbol changing notification region of the special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284. Is displayed as a stop sign, and it is a big hit. Further, when there is no change in the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hit before and after the re-lottery effect, but the effect display EF1 is displayed, only the setting suggestion may be included. For example, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect in the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 1 is denied. A setting suggestion may be made. In addition, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect due to the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 4 or more is confirmed. A setting suggestion may be made. In addition, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect due to the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 6 is confirmed. Suggestions may be given, and conversely, it may be more pleasing to the player than if the player is not promoted in the re-lottery.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect fails, the setting may be suggested. Specifically, when the re-lottery effect fails, it is a normal operation to make the same combination of decorative symbols displayed before and after the re-lottery, but as shown in FIG. 27 (c ''), It may be a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols for which it is confirmed and confirmed that the probability is a big jackpot, and the symbols may be different before and after the re-lottery. That is, the combination of the decorative patterns before the re-lottery was "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", but as a result of the re-lottery, the decoration pattern of the jackpot of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" Combinations may be derived. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion may be made by changing the big hit symbols before and after the re-lottery. In this case, as the design after the re-lottery shows, the effect suggests that the setting is 4 or more. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display EF1 is displayed despite the failure of the re-lottery effect so that it is easy to recognize that it is a setting suggestion effect, thereby giving the player a feeling of strangeness. . It should be noted that the effect display EF1 may not be displayed, and when the effect display EF1 is displayed, for example, an effect that succeeds in promotion is performed by a promotion effect during a big hit game, etc. It may also include suggesting that. If the effect display EF1 is not displayed, the setting suggestion may not be included. After that, when the symbol variation time elapses and the timing of the symbol stop display comes, as shown in FIG. 27 (d ″), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is confirmed and displayed. In accordance with this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the surface is also displayed as "444", and "○" in the symbol fluctuation notification region of the special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284. Is displayed as a stop sign, and it is a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the re-lottery effect fails, the setting may be suggested, so that it may be possible to enhance the effect. The combination of the jackpot decorative pattern and the display of the effect display EF1 may be associated with the setting suggestion. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display EF1 is displayed when the re-lottery effect is successful and when the setting suggestion is performed, and the aspect of the effect display EF1 is the same aspect, but the content of the effect is different. May be. Further, when the effect display EF1 is displayed and suggests a setting, it may be a false setting suggestion. For example, the higher the setting, the easier the setting suggestion (false setting suggestion) is. The lower the setting, the less likely the setting suggestion (false setting suggestion) is performed. Further, in this example of effect, the effect indication EF1 is displayed to give the setting suggestion, but for example, the setting suggestion may be made by making the color or the pattern of the pattern different from usual. , By setting the voice output that is output when a big hit is different from usual (usually "Congratulations" is output, in the case of setting suggestion, "chance" is output, etc.) May be performed. Further, the setting suggestion may be performed by using another probability variation confirmation notification effect, or the setting suggestion may be performed by being executed at a timing different from the normal execution timing of the probability variation confirmation notification effect. The setting confirmation may be included in the probability change confirmation notification. Further, the setting suggestion may be made based on the effect contents in the re-lottery effect, and for example, the display requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is in a mode different from the normal one (a mode in which the color difference or the size is different from the normal one). In that case, the setting suggestion may be included, or the setting suggestion may be performed by the operation means (for example, the production button 136) required to be operated at the time of the re-lottery being different from the usual one.

  Regarding the suggestion of setting in the re-lottery effect, it may be made executable when a specific condition is satisfied. There may be suggestions. Further, for example, the date of holding the event in the game arcade may be set using RTC (Real Time Clock), and the setting suggestion may be performed on the date. Further, for example, the generation condition may be customized by the player on a setting screen that can be moved during the demonstration effect, and the setting may be suggested when the customized condition is satisfied. It goes without saying that the above can be applied to the setting suggestive effect described above and can be applied to the setting suggestive effect described later.

  Next, an example of an effect relating to the total number of winning prize balls in the jackpot gaming state executed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit game state centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 28 (1a) to FIG. 28 (1d) show an example of an effect that is normally performed for the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit. FIG. 28 (1a) shows the state where the big hit game relating to the 10R certainty variation big hit in the special figure 2 is being executed, which is the hit from the first time to the eighth time. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1a), the game has moved to the eighth round, and there are 74 ball game balls in the second variable winning port 235a in the jackpot game, so 1215 game balls in the jackpot game. "1110 / 1500get!", Which indicates that the winning of the coin has been achieved and that 1500 coins can be expected in the jackpot game, is displayed below the round number display in the upper center of the display screen. In the lower left corner of the display screen, "8th" indicating the number of hits from the first time is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, "1380pt", which is the total number of award balls acquired in the big hit game and the small hit game from the first time to the seventh time, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1a), it is a state in which 2490 prize balls have been won from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  After that, when one game ball enters the second variable winning port 235a, it means that 2010 prize balls have been won since the first big hit game started, and 2505 total winning prize balls with good sharpness. It can be said that you have won the number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of award balls (2500) with good sharpness is obtained in this way, as shown in FIG. 28 (1b), an effect image including the characters “2500pt get !!” (It may be referred to as a “cut number display image”) is displayed large in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 to congratulate the player for winning the prize ball. In addition, when the total winning award ball counts "2500 pt" in the process of counting up the total winning award ball count after the jackpot game is over, a drill number display image such as "2500 pt get !!" It may be displayed.

  FIG. 28 (1c) shows that the big hit game relating to the 10R certainty variation big hit in the special figure 2 is being executed since the first to fifteenth hits. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1c), the process has shifted to 4R, and since 32 game balls have been won in the second variable winning port 235a in the jackpot game, 480 game balls have been won in the jackpot game. "480 / 1500get!", Which indicates that there are 1500 coins in the jackpot game, is displayed below the round number display in the upper center of the display screen. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, "15th time" indicating the number of occurrences of hits from the first time is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, "4510pt", which is the total number of award balls acquired in the big hit game and the small hit game from the first time to the 14th time, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1c), it is in a state where 4990 prize balls have been won from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  After that, when one game ball enters the second variable winning a prize port 235a, it means that 5005 prize balls have been won since the first big hit game was started, and 5000 good total winning prize balls. It can be said that you have won the number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of award balls with good sharpness (for example, the number of award balls that is a multiple of 2500) is obtained in this way, as shown in FIG. 28 (1d), “5000 pt get !! The number-of-cuts display image including the character “” is displayed large in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208 to congratulate the player on winning a prize ball. In addition, when the total winning prize balls count "5000pt" in the process of counting up the total winning prize balls display after the jackpot game is over, a drill number display image such as "5000pt get !!" It may be displayed. Note that, in the present embodiment, setting suggestion using the drill number display image is performed according to the determination in the suggestive effect appearance pattern determination process in step S715 of the suggestive effect selection process during initial big hit shown in FIG. 17, but, for example, FIG. Instead of the drill number display image shown in 1d), setting suggestion may be performed by changing the display mode of the character "5000" as shown in FIG. 28 (1d '). In this case, for example, since it indicates that the display mode of “5000” related to the setting 5 is changed, it indicates that the setting is 5 or more. The mode of setting suggestion is not limited to this, and another method may be used. For example, the setting suggestion may be performed by a voice output or a light emitting mode of a lamp.

  FIG. 28 (2a) to FIG. 28 (2d) show an example of an effect in which setting suggestion is made in relation to the display of the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit. 28 (2a) to FIG. 28 (2b) have the same effect contents as those in FIG. 28 (1a) to 28 (1b), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 (2c) is a hit from the first time to the ninth time, and shows that the big hit game related to the 10R certainty big hit in special figure 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (2c), the process has shifted to 2R, and since 11 game balls have been won in the second variable winning port 235a in the jackpot game, 165 game balls have been won in the jackpot game. "165/1500 get!", Which indicates that there are 1500 balls to be expected in the jackpot game, is displayed below the round number display in the upper center of the display screen. In the lower left corner of the display screen, “9th time” indicating the number of hits from the first time is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen, "4380pt", which is the total number of award balls acquired in the big hit game and the small hit game from the first time to the eighth time, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (2c), it is a state where 4545 prize balls have been won from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  After that, when one game ball enters the second variable winning port 235a, 4560 prize balls have been won since the first big hit game was started, but in the present embodiment, for example, FIG. In the suggestion effect appearance pattern determination process in step S715 in the first big hit suggestion effect selection process, it is determined that the set suggestion effect is to be performed with the total number of award balls of 4,560. Since it is not a multiple of 2500 shots, the drill number display image is not displayed, but the drill number display image including the characters “4560pt get !!” is displayed as the setting suggestive effect. Thereby, the player may be able to recognize that the setting is high due to the discomfort that the number-of-kills display image is displayed with the total number of winning prize balls other than the so-called number of holes. The drill number display image as the setting suggesting effect shown in FIG. 28 (2d) indicates that the setting is 4 or more. When displaying the number-of-cuts display image with the total number of winning balls other than the number of cuts and making a setting suggestion, a display mode different from the normal number-of-kills display image (for example, a display mode of numbers is different) It may be easier to recognize that the setting suggestion is being made. The mode of setting suggestion is not limited to this, and another method may be used. For example, the setting suggestion may be performed by a voice output or a light emitting mode of a lamp.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the continuous notice effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  29, the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp. The illustration of 220 and the universal figure holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29A, a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29 (a), both the special symbols 1 and 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, “x” is displayed in both the symbol variation notification area of special figure 1 and the symbol variation notification area of special figure 2.

  Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 29 is the normal gaming state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), so the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is also displayed by the number of lightings of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of the special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 29A, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special map 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special map 1, and these three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special map 1 are All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a circular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. The third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special diagram 1 that is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching. Shows the same display mode (the circular unpatterned and white display mode) as the other hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. The same applies to the following description. Note that there may be a case where a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a pre-reading notice display form) by the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading.

  In FIG. 29 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 29C, the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. That is, in this effect example, the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eye is displayed in a shifted manner, and it may be possible for the player to recognize that either the continuous notice or the setting suggestion is displayed.

  In FIG. 29D, the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 is again stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. That is, in this effect example, the off-set display is continuously made in the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes, and the setting suggestion is suppressed from being continuously displayed. It may be possible to recognize that continuous notice is given rather than suggestion, and it may be possible to increase the expectation for the big hit.

  In FIG. 29 (f), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  After that, in FIG. 29 (g), the decorative symbols of "decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started.

  In FIG. 29 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 29 (i). , SP Reach (Swordsman Reach) has been developed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (i) to 29 (m) are performed, but since effects similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (o) to 22 (y) are performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. To do.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 29, the continuous notice effect in which the combination of the decorative patterns of the “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” is consecutive is performed, so that the expectation for the big hit can be increased. Sometimes you can.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the setting suggestion effect in the decorative symbol variable display centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  In FIG. 30, a decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the universal figure holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 30 (a), both the special symbols 1 and 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, “x” is displayed in both the symbol variation notification area of special figure 1 and the symbol variation notification area of special figure 2.

  Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 30 is a normal gaming state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), so the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is also displayed by the number of lightings of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of the special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 30 (a), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and these three hold icons h11 to h13 of special figure 1 are All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a circular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. The third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special diagram 1 that is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching. Shows the same display mode (the circular unpatterned and white display mode) as the other hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. The same applies to the following description. Note that there may be a case where a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a pre-reading notice display form) by the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading.

  In FIG. 30B, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 30C, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. That is, in this effect example, the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eye is displayed in a shifted manner, and it may be possible for the player to recognize that either the continuous notice or the setting suggestion is displayed.

  In FIG. 30D, the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. It becomes the icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. That is, in this production example, the off-set display in the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eye is not continuous, and the player can recognize that the setting suggestion is made, not the continuous notice, and the expectation for the high setting. It may be possible to give a feeling.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the setting suggestion effect in the decorative symbol variable display centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 31 (1a) to FIG. 31 (1e) show an example of an effect for displaying the start number between big hits, which is the number of times of variable display between big hits. In addition, the start number between big hits in the present embodiment refers to the number of symbol fluctuation display from the end of the electric support state that shifts after the normal big hit ends to the next big hit. In addition, it may be the number of symbol fluctuation displays from the end of the normal big hit until the next big hit (that is, it may include the number of symbol fluctuation displays in the electric power support state).

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (1a), a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (1a), both the special symbols 1 and 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown to that effect, “x” is displayed in both the symbol variation notification area of special figure 1 and the symbol variation notification area of special figure 2.

  Further, the control state (gaming state) in FIG. 31 (1a) is a normal gaming state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), so the hold icon display of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A region 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is also displayed by the number of lightings of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of the special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 31 (1a), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a circular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (1a), the big hit start number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1a), the start number display during the big hit is displayed as "244 revolutions after big hit", and the special support 1 and It shows that the symbol variation display of special figure 2 has been performed 244 times. In the present embodiment, the big hit start number display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but it may be displayed on another display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or the like).

  In FIG. 31 (1b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the start number display during the big hit is counted by 1 and the display is updated to "245 rotations after the big hit".

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1c), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 31 (1d), the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the big hit start number display is counted by 1 and the display is updated to "246 rotations after big hit".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1e), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 8-decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, the big hit start number display is displayed in this manner. For example, the big hit start number display shown in FIG. 31 (1e) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 31 (1e ′) to suggest the setting. May be performed. That is, the mode of the numbers in the big hit start number display shown in FIG. 31 (1e ′) is different from the normal display, and in this effect example, any of the even setting (setting 2, setting 4 and setting 6). Or) is suggested. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, a setting suggestion of an even number setting is produced, but for example, a combination of numbers that implies the current setting (for example, if the display mode changes at 444 rotations, setting 4 or more is suggested). However, if the display mode is changed by 555 rotations, setting 5 or more is suggested.) By changing the display mode, setting suggestion of various modes can be performed. It should be noted that the suggestion for setting by displaying the number of starts between the big hits is, for example, the lower setting tends to increase the number of symbol fluctuations between the big hits, so the lower setting is more likely to occur (for example, in the case of setting 2 or 3). In addition, the setting suggestion effect such as denying the setting 1 is performed) so that the player does not get tired.

  FIG. 31 (2a) to FIG. 31 (2e) are effects of displaying the remaining symbol variation display count of the electric power support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state) that shifts after the big hit game related to the normal big hit. An example is shown.

  On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the symbols are stopped and displayed for special figure 1, while the variable display is being performed for special figure 2, and the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 in the corner, as shown to that effect, “x” is displayed in the symbol variation notification area of special figure 1, but in the symbol variation notification area of special figure 2. "-" Representing that the symbol variation display is being displayed is displayed. In the electric support state, since the effect display mainly for the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is performed, the effect related to the symbol variable display of the special symbol 2 (variation display of the decorative symbol) is performed in the decorative symbol display device. Absent.

  Further, since the control state (game state) in FIG. 31 (2a) is a power support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), the hold icon display of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A region 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is also displayed by the number of lightings of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of the special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 31 (2a), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and these three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a circular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the remaining symbol variable display count display in the electric power support state is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the remaining symbol variation display count display is displayed as "electric support remaining 8 times", and the remaining symbol variation display count until the electric support state ends is 8 times. It is shown. In the present embodiment, the remaining symbol variation display count display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but it may be displayed on another display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal).

  In FIG. 31 (2b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the remaining symbol variation display count is decremented by 1 and the display is updated to "7 remaining electric power support".

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. By the way, two game balls have entered the special figure 1 starting opening (lower) 231 by the time the symbol variation display of this time ends, so the number of reservations of special figure 1 is four.

  In FIG. 31 (2d), the hold icons h11 to h14 of Toku-zu 1 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes, and the hold icons at the display positions of the second to fourth hold icons h12 to h14 become the first to third hold icons h11 to h13 of Toku-zu 1, respectively. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the remaining symbol variation display count is decremented by 1 and the display is updated to "6 remaining power supply support".

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2e), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 8-decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, the remaining symbol variation display count display is displayed in this manner, but for example, the remaining symbol variation display count display shown in FIG. 31 (2e) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 31 (2e ′). You may make it suggest setting. That is, the mode of the numbers in the remaining symbol variation display number display shown in FIG. 31 (2e ') is a display different from the normal display, which suggests that the setting 6 is set in this example of effect. In addition, although the setting suggestion of the setting 6 is produced in this example of performance, for example, a number suggesting the current setting (for example, if the display mode changes with the remaining 45 rotations, the setting 4 or 5 is suggested). However, when the display mode changes with the remaining 44 rotations, the setting mode of 4 or more is suggested.) By changing the display mode, the setting suggestion of various modes can be performed.

  Note that the manner of changing the display mode of the numbers is not limited to the above-described one, and for example, the display mode may be changed by changing the color, size, or shape of the numbers, or the characters may be added to display. The setting may be suggested by doing so. Further, for example, at the time of displaying "6 remaining power supply support", the setting suggestion may be performed by deleting the remaining symbol variable display count display. Further, for example, when "246 rotations after the big hit" is displayed, the setting suggestion may be made by deleting the start number display during the big hit. Further, the big hit start number display and the remaining symbol variation display number display may be displayed only for a good number of times such as "10". In this case, for example, a specific number other than the number of good times for the sharpness may be displayed. The setting may be suggested by displaying the number of times (for example, “66”).

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion is made by changing the display mode of the symbol variable display number and the display mode of the remaining symbol variable display number of the power support is shown, but, for example, a succession of big hits (small hits) Even if the effect is performed when the number of times is a specific number (for example, every five times) is performed when the number of times is different from the specific number of times (for example, the fourth time), the setting suggestion may be performed. Good. Further, the setting suggestion may be performed by performing an effect different from the specific effect, assuming that the specific effect is executed at a specific number of times (for example, every five times). Further, in the present embodiment, an example of an effect is shown in which the setting suggestion is made by the remaining symbol variation display number of the electric support, but for example, in a so-called ST machine, the setting suggestion is made by the probability variation remaining symbol variation display number. Good.

  Next, another example of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the setting suggestion effect centering on the decorative pattern display device.

  FIG. 32 (A) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is finished in the normal game state, and in accordance with this, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of the outliers. In the present embodiment, usually, in accordance with the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also stopped and displayed with the same symbol combination (for example, as shown in FIG. 32). , When the stop display is performed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with “417”.), In the example of the effect shown in FIG. For the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, the mini-designation is “121”, and setting 1 and setting 2 are denied, that is, setting 3 or more is suggested. are doing. It should be noted that the display mode of the mini symbol is not limited to the above-described one. For example, when the mini symbol different from the combination of the decorative symbols is "456", it is suggested that the setting is 4 or more. Good. Further, a high setting may be suggested by the frequency of the combination of the decorative symbols and the result of the mini symbols not matching.

  FIG. 32 (B) shows another example of the effect of setting suggestion by the mini pattern. In this production example, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” which is out of alignment, whereas the mini-pattern is stopped and displayed as “1-1-panda”. For example, the setting suggestion that the setting 1 is denied is shown. In addition, when "panda" appears in the mini design, the setting 6 may be confirmed, and the design may be used as a high setting confirmation symbol, or may be used as a symbol indicating that the setting is changed. May be.

  FIG. 32 (C-1) to FIG. 32 (C-2) show an example of an effect when an over-winning is achieved in the small hit game. That is, in the small hit game in the present embodiment, the small hit game ends when ten game balls win the second variable winning port 235a, but the game ball enters from the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a. It may take some time to pass through the winning count switch SW1. Therefore, there may be a case where more than 10 game balls are won (so-called over-win) in the second variable winning port 235a. In the present embodiment, in the small hit game, when an over-winning occurs, as shown in FIG. 32 (C-2), 165 award balls are generated because 11 game balls are won. “165/150 get!” Indicating the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained in the small hit game is displayed in the upper center part of the display screen. Further, in the present embodiment, when an over-winning is generated, a predetermined over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that the number of prize balls corresponding to the over-winning prize may not be displayed. Further, the over-winning sound may not be output.

  In this embodiment, setting suggestion may be performed when an over-winning occurs. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (C-2 ′) or FIG. 32 (C-2 ″) instead of the normal over-prize sound (voice output “picone”) shown in FIG. 32 (C-2). In some cases, an over-winning sound including a setting suggestion may be output. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 32 (C-2 '), the normal over-winning sound is changed to another over-winning sound, thereby suggesting that the setting is high. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 32 (C-2 ″), it is suggested that the setting is 4 or more by outputting, for example, a sound “Sigoro” instead of the normal over-prize sound. There is. In the present embodiment, as the suggestive effect that is performed at the time of over-winning, the setting suggestive effect is performed by voice output. However, for example, display by an image or high setting suggestion by changing the light emission pattern of the lamp may be performed. . Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect in the case of over-winning in the small hit game state has been described, but the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the case of over-winning in the big hit game state.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the example of the effect of suggesting the setting by the over-winning sound is shown, but for example, the opening sound of the variable winning opening output at the start of the round, the winning sound output when winning the variable winning opening, etc. For example, a voice different from the normal one may be output to suggest the setting.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and when shifting to a certain effect mode among the effect modes, a specific condition (for example, when the next symbol variable display after SP reach is started) In the case where it is configured such that the transition may be performed when the above conditions are established, the setting suggestion may be performed by transitioning to a certain production mode at a timing different from the specific condition. In addition, there may be a case where a pre-reading mode that pre-reads that a specific reach effect will be finally given will be made. It may be performed. Further, in a pachinko machine that produces a big hit by displaying a combination of decorative designs of big hits on any of the plurality of effective lines, a certain effective line (for example, center line) The setting suggestion may be given in some cases by displaying a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns. Further, the effect (tutorial effect) that explains when the setting suggestion may be performed may or may not be performed. Further, the timing at which the setting suggestion is performed may be constantly notified, or the timing at which the setting suggestion is performed may be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an example of an effect when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining an example of the staging effect centered on the decorative symbol display device.

  33, a decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp. The illustration of 220 and the universal figure holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  FIG. 33 (a) shows a state in which the 49th variation display of symbols is being performed in the electric power support state which has been shifted after the end of the big hit game relating to the normal big hit. As in the present embodiment, in the simultaneous variation machine in which both the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 may be performed at the same time, the number of remaining variations in the electric support state at the start of symbol variation display is Decremented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is started for the 50th time in the electric support state, the electric support state ends and the normal game state is entered. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a), after the big hit game related to the normal big hit, the last symbol variation display in the electric support state will be displayed. Therefore, in the lower right part of the display screen, the character "Den support" is displayed to inform that effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a), both the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 are simultaneously performed. In addition, in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the symbol variation time of a small hit is 580 seconds is displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 (a) is a power support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the electric power support state, although the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the number of the holding number display area of the special figure 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 or the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 33 (a), four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and all of the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 is the electric power support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), the special figure 1 start port (lower) 231 is won. This is because the variable display of Toku-zu 1 is executed more often.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (b) shows the state when the 49th symbol variable display is completed by combining the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 after the end of the normal big hit game. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), in the present embodiment, after the normal jackpot game is over, the electric power support state is continued until the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 50 is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b), the special figure 1 is displayed as a result of the disengagement, and in accordance with this, the decorative design is also a combination of the disparate decorative designs of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The display is stopped. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "417". In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display which is still a small hit is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (c), the state that the big hit game related to the normal big hit is finished and the 50th symbol variation display is started in the special figure 1 is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (c), symbol variation display is continuously performed in the special figure 2, and there are four symbol variation displays that are being held (that is, hold 4). Further, in the special figure 1, there are three symbol variable displays that are suspended (that is, suspended 3). Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), when the 50th symbol variation display starts and the electric support state ends, the state shifts to the normal game state, so that the player makes a right-handed stroke when left-handed Will be at a disadvantage. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display of "right-handed" displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen disappears, and a left-hand suggestion of "return to left-handed!" Is suggested below the decorative pattern in the variable display. Notification is given. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display which is still a small hit is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (d), it is shown that the big hit game related to the normal big hit is finished and the 51st symbol variation display is finished in the special figure 1 and the result of the deviation is displayed. ing. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (d), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the deviating symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "541". In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display which is still a small hit is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 33 (e), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display which is still a small hit is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 33 (f) shows that the symbol variable display is then performed a plurality of times and the result of a certain symbol variable display is displayed. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (f), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 8-decoration 0-decoration 3", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, since the number of symbols to be displayed in the special figure 1 is 3 and the number of figures to be displayed in the special figure 2 is 4, there are 3 in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (f), the special variable 2 is still a small variable hit and the variable display is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 33 (g), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display, which is still a small hit, is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 33 (h), a state is shown in which after reaching the reach, the SP reach is entered. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display which is still a small hit is continuously displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (i), it is shown that the symbol variation display, which is the symbol variation time of 580 seconds of the special figure 2, ends and the result of the small hit (for example, "special figure f") is derived. ing. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the period from when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed until the small hit game related to the small hit is finished, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended, and substantially. The display of the result of the variable display of the special figure 1 is postponed by the amount of interruption. However, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2, and the small hit occurs, the effect of the variable display of the decorative symbol related to the variable display of the special figure 1 is continuously performed without interruption.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (j), the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted even while the small hit game is being performed. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, SP reach continues to proceed. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (j), it is shown that the lord's character is defeated by the swordsman's character and is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". Then, when the small hit game ends, as shown in FIG. 33 (k), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the special figure 2 is started, and the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been suspended is resumed. It Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in order to return from the SP reach to the default background image, the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 and the mini symbol are all temporarily displayed. Is shown.

  Then, when the arrival of the initial symbol variation time (for example, 90 seconds) of the special figure 1 approaches, as shown in FIG. 33 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4". The swing fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Then, when the initial symbol variation time of the special figure 1 arrives, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (m) displays the characters "Wait a moment" together with the characters of the plurality of child pandas. Motase normal effect (Mamatase normal effect 1) is performed. The normal effect that is given while the child panda character appears is an effect that is executed when the “special figure f” is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. Note that the content of the time-stamping effect is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate. After that, when the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (n), the result of deviation is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4”. -Decoration 3-decoration 4 "is stopped and displayed with a combination of deviating decorative patterns, and mini-designs are also stopped and displayed with" 434 "to confirm the deviating display result. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, since the number of symbols to be displayed for variable display in the special figure 1 is two and the number to be held for variable display of symbols in the special figure 2 is three, there are two in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (n), the special figure 2 is still continuously displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special drawing f" is displayed in the special drawing 2 and a small hit occurs, the effect is performed for the content shown in FIG. 33 (m). When another small hit result (for example, “special figure g”) is displayed in FIG. 2 and a small hit occurs, instead of the make-up effect shown in FIG. 33 (m), FIG. ), The staggering effect (sustaining normal effect 2) may be performed. In the case of a small hit, the staging effect may be executed for the same content regardless of the type of special figure stopped. In addition, in this example of performance, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 in the variable display of the special figure 1 in which SP reach is performed, for example, a special long-term effect for SP reach is performed as the temporary effect. Alternatively, the stage change effect in which the background image changes may be performed together with the pause effect or after the pause effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, an example of the pre-reading notice effect that may be performed when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-reading notice effect, which is provided mainly for the decorative symbol display device.

  34, the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the universal figure holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the 50th symbol variation display is being performed in the electric support state which has shifted after the big hit game relating to the normal big hit. That is, it is the last symbol variation display that is in the electric support state after the big hit game related to the normal big hit. Therefore, in the lower right part of the display screen, the character "Den support" is displayed to inform that effect. Note that, as described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation machine capable of displaying symbol variation display simultaneously on the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and therefore the timing shown in FIG. 34 (a). Then, both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are simultaneously performed. In addition, in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the symbol variation time of a small hit is 580 seconds is displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 34 (a) is an electric support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the electric power support state, although the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the number of the holding number display area of the special figure 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 or the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of hold icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, .... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older winnings.

  In FIG. 34 (a), four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and all of the four hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. The third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special diagram 1 that is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching. 1 has the same display mode as the hold icons h11, h12, and h14 of the other special maps 1 (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description. Note that there may be a case where a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a pre-reading notice display form) by the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading. 34 (a) to 34 (e) are the same as FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (e) except that the third hold in FIG. 1 is the target of prefetching. , Description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (f), the symbol variation display which is the symbol variation time of 580 seconds of the special symbol 2 is completed and the result of the small hit (for example, "special symbol g") is derived. The situation is shown. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the period from the occurrence of the small hit to the end of the small hit game relating to the small hit, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special FIG. The display of the result of the symbol variable display of No. 1 is postponed by the amount of interruption. However, even if a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the effect of the variable display of the decorative symbol related to the variable display of the special figure 1 is continuously performed without interruption.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the progress of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is interrupted even while the small hit game is being performed. Then, when the small hit game ends, as shown in FIG. 34 (h), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the special figure 2 is started, and the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been suspended is resumed. It

  Then, when the arrival of the initial symbol variation time (for example, 9 seconds) of the special figure 1 approaches, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of left decorative symbol> right decorative symbol> middle decorative symbol, and as a result, FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the swing fluctuation is started in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1”. Then, in this effect example, when the initial symbol variation time of the special figure 1 arrives, the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (j) displays a sliding screen on the entire display screen and opens the sliding screen. A character GLG, a Gol-grandpa who smokes a cigarette, appears from the inside, and the character "heat" is displayed, showing that a look-ahead notice is being given using the effect for a while. During this time, the execution time of the pre-reading notice effect corresponds to the period from when the small hit occurs to when the small hit game related to the small hit ends (that is, the period during which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is suspended). . It should be noted that the execution time of the above-mentioned time-stamping effect (time-stamping pre-reading notice effect) does not necessarily have to coincide with the period during which the symbol variable display of special figure 1 is suspended, and the variable display of special figure 1 Any time may be set as long as it corresponds to the suspended period. In addition, the execution time of the staggering effect (preliminary look-ahead notice effect) is always performed for a fixed time (for example, 2 seconds) regardless of the period during which the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is suspended. Good. After that, when the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 34 (k), the result of deviation is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4 -Decoration 5-decoration 1 "is stopped and displayed with a combination of deviating decorative patterns, and mini-designs are also stopped and displayed with" 451 "to confirm the deviating display result. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, since the number of symbols to be displayed for variable display in the special figure 1 is two and the number to be held for variable display of symbols in the special figure 2 is three, there are two in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (k), the special figure 2 is still continuously displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special drawing g" is displayed in the special drawing 2 and a small hit occurs, the pre-reading advance notice effect is performed during the content shown in FIG. 34 (j). , When another small hit result (for example, “special drawing f”) is displayed in the special map 2 and the small hit occurs, the contents different from the pre-reading notice effect for the duration shown in FIG. 34 (j) The pre-reading notice effect may be performed for a while, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (j '), an effect in which a sabotani group appears may be performed as a pre-notification effect for a long time. Further, in the case of a small hit, the effect may be executed for the same content regardless of the type of the special figure stopped. In this case, for example, the color of a certain character or character may be changed depending on the type of small hit. Further, the reliability of the pre-reading notice to be executed may be different depending on the type of small hit. Further, the reliability of the pre-reading notice may be different depending on the type of small hit and the contents of the pre-reading notice to be executed.

  In FIG. 34 (l), the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is still continued.

  After that, in FIG. 34 (m), the decorative symbols of "decoration 4" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (n), the decoration pattern of "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the middle pattern display area 208b, and the fluctuation fluctuation starts in the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". To be done. Further, at this time, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is erased, and only the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. It should be noted that the mini symbols are continuously variably displayed for all the symbols until the symbols are fixedly displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (o), the decorative pattern starts changing display again together with the display of the characters "re-lottery !!", and the re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, it is a big hit and after the big hit game, it is decided that a transition to a positive variation state that is advantageous to the player is decided. It is expected that the combination of the decoration pattern of the decoration 7-decoration 7 "will be finally displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (p), the combination of the decorative symbols does not change from the combination of the big hits of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", and the re-lottery effect is failed. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (q), the combination of the large-decor decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 34 (q) is stopped and displayed with “◯”, and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of “444”. In FIG. 34 (q), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (r), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "challenge big hit" is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and a character of "right hit!" Is displayed. We are pushing for a right hit.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. When there is a target of the pre-reading notice based on this, the pre-reading notice is given in the production for a while, so that it is possible to entertain the player with the time until the symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is a big hit. Sometimes you can have a sense of expectations. It should be noted that, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is performed during the period shown in FIG. In addition, in this effect example, the special example 2 is a small hit, the progress is interrupted, but the effect example of the case where the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is out is shown, but the special figure 2 is a small hit. When the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is interrupted by this is a big hit, the pre-reading notice production is not performed for a while, that is, after the variation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started, it is special. Until the fixed display of FIG. 1, the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern is continuously performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the special figure 1 in the symbol variation display is a big hit, a staging effect is given. After the shaking fluctuation has started, the shaking fluctuation is continued until the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, but is not executed (intermitting pre-reading warning effect). Production) may be executed. Further, in this effect example, for example, a continuous notice as a pre-reading notice effect that continues a plurality of times, or a pre-reading mode as a pre-reading notice effect that continues a plurality of times is made to start before the pre-reading notice effect is executed. There may be a case where the prefetching notice effect is superposedly executed during the prefetching notice effect.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (h), in the normal game state, when the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is started during the execution of symbol variation display in which Toku-zu 2 is a big hit. An example of the effect will be described.

  35, the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the universal figure holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (a), the combination of decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 35 (a), the special symbol 1 is in a state of being stopped and displayed, but the special symbol 2 is in the variable display of symbols, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the number-of-holds display area 284, "X" is displayed in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 so as to show that, and in the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 2, it indicates that the symbol is being changed. "-" Is displayed. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 35 (a) is a normal game state (special probability low probability general figure low probability state), so the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of the special figure 1 is also displayed by the number of lightings of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284, and the number of holding icons of the special figure 1. The number of holdings of the special figure 2 is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 0, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 2.

  After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure starting opening (upper) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b), as shown in FIG. 35 (c), in parallel with the symbol variation display on the special figure 2 display device 214. Then, the symbol variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (d), the decorative symbol in the variable display is reduced and moved to the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is a big hit. The character “Beginning big jackpot! In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the symbol variation time of the special figure 2 is extremely long, about 10 minutes, so that the player may include a symbol variation display that is a big hit. In some cases, the player may stop playing the game without noticing this, which may be disadvantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being disadvantaged in this way, for example, when the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is started during the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 which is a big hit, It is so arranged that the result of the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is a big hit. Further, with such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent wasteful driving. Further, in the present embodiment, since the variable display of the decorative design is displayed for a moment, the display of "preparing for big hit !!" is performed, so that the variable display is once displayed for the large decorative design and then the big hit is being prepared. Sometimes it can surprise a player. Further, it is possible to display "big hit preparing!" Without starting the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this case, a large decorative pattern is not displayed once and the process is in preparation, so that the user can feel as if he / she got one hold by making an illusion that it was a continuation of the previous change. Sometimes you can. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (d), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is increased by one and one holding icon h11 is displayed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (e), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a symbol ("special figure C"), and the decorative pattern is also changed to "special figure 3-special figure 4-". It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are outside the special figure 1. Further, the mini design displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also stopped and displayed at "341" in accordance with the decorative display that is stopped and displayed. In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is still continued, and the display of the character "Begin big jackpot!" Is still continued.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (f), the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 which has been suspended is started. At this time, the decorative symbols are also displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of special symbols 1. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is still continuing, and the display of the character “Being prepared for big hits !!” is still continuing. Therefore, it may be possible to make it look as if the advance notice (continuous notice) is given.

  After that, the symbol variation time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (g), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol (for example, "special figure b"). In accordance with this, “◯” is displayed in the symbol changing notification region of the special symbol 2 of the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284. Further, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is being executed is discarded, and the symbol is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol. In accordance with this, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is stopped with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and the mini-pattern is also stopped and displayed with “417” accordingly. There is. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (h), the characters "Challenge big hit" indicating that it has become a big hit and the characters "Right hit right!" Are displayed, and the player hits right. It encourages the game ball to pass to the jackpot generation gate 252. After that, when the game ball passes the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  In this way, in the present embodiment, when the big hit in the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is discarded at that time, and the off symbol is Will be displayed. If there is a symbol variation display that is suspended in the special figure 1, it will be sequentially digested after the big hit game related to the big hit in the special figure 2 is finished. In addition, when the big hit in special figure 1 during the special variation display of special figure 2, the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is discarded at the time of the big hit in special figure 1, and the symbol is out. Will be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which it is applied to a simultaneous fluctuation machine has been described, but it is also applicable to other types of pachinko machines, for example, it is also possible to apply it to a one-kind two-kind mixer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36 (1a) to FIG. 36 (1h), an example of an effect when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the probability variation state will be described. 36, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220. , And the universal figure holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  FIG. 36 (1a) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed in the probability variation state. As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation machine capable of simultaneously performing symbol variation display on the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 Both of the variable display of special figure 2 are performed in parallel. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 2.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1a), the character of "small hit RUSH" indicating that the small hit RUSH is in progress (that is, in the probability change state) is displayed as "0480pt". It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handedness are displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 (1a) is a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the probability changing state is provided with the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probability changing state, the pending icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 2 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holding figures display area of special figure 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of the hold icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 36 (1a), the three hold icons h21, h22, h23 of the special map 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special map 2, and these three hold icons h21, h22 of the special map 1, All h23 are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 36 (1a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of special figure 1. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 is a probable variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), the special figure 2 is made to win by the start opening 232. This is because the variable display of 2 is executed frequently.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1b) shows that the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed as a falling symbol (“special symbol C”). In accordance with this, in the symbol changing notification region of the special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284, “x” indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is still continued, and the decorative symbols are also variably displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 2.

  After that, one of the pending symbol variation display of special figure 1 is consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1c) shows that the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. There is. The symbol variation display of this special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is a big hit.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1d) shows a state in which the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is finished. At the timing shown in FIG. 36 (1d), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the deviation, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also "decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8" in accordance with this. It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of sync. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638". On the other hand, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is still continuing.

  After that, one symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been held is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (1e), above the decorative symbol in the variable display. The character "approaching the big hit !!" is displayed, and the notice of the big hit is given in the special map 1. As a result, the player can recognize that it is a big hit, and it may be possible to further increase the expectation for the big hit and prevent wasteful hitting. In addition, you may make it the notice of the big hit of the special figure 1 by changing the display mode of the decorative pattern during variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (1f), the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed is moved to the upper right corner of the display screen to be reduced and displayed, while the character “Big hit approaching !!” is enlarged and displayed.

  After that, the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (1g), the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol (for example, "special figure B"). In accordance with this, "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification region of the special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284. In addition, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is discarded, and the symbol is stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol. In accordance with this, in the decorative design display device 208, the display is stopped by a combination of decorative designs that are out of "decoration 0-decoration 3-decoration 4", and the mini design is also stopped and displayed by "034". There is. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1h), the characters "Challenge big hit" indicating that the big hit has been displayed together with the characters "Right hit!", And the player hits the right. It encourages the game ball to pass to the jackpot generation gate 252. After that, when the game ball passes the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is discarded at that time, and the off symbol is Will be displayed. In addition, when there is a symbol variation display which is reserved in the special figure 2, it will be sequentially digested after the big hit game related to the big hit in the special figure 1 is finished. In addition, when the big hit in special figure 2 during the special variation display of special figure 1, similarly, the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is discarded at the time of the big hit in special figure 2 Will be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36 (2a) to FIG. 36 (2e), an example of an effect when a big hit occurs in Toku-zu 1 in the probability variation state will be described. In this effect example, there is no suspension of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, and there is no symbol variation display. As shown in FIG. 36 (2a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, It is a standby state display in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed.

  FIG. 36 (2a) shows a state in which only the special figure 1 is changed and displayed in the probability variation state. In the probability change state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special diagram 2, the effect display according to the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is Not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2a), the character of "small hit RUSH" indicating that the small hit RUSH is in progress (that is, in the probability change state) is displayed as "0480pt". It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handedness are displayed.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 (2a) is a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the probability changing state is provided with the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probability changing state, the pending icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 2 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holding figures display area of special figure 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of the hold icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (2a), since there is no variable display of symbols that are held in the special figure 2, no holding icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and Since the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is not performed, the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 280. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special figure 1. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 is a probable variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state) as described above, a special figure is given by making the special figure 2 start port 232 win. This is because the variable display of 2 is executed frequently.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2b) shows that the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol (“special figure C”). In accordance with this, in the symbol changing notification region of the special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284, “x” indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variable display is not yet started, and the decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the "decoration 0-decoration 3-decoration 4".

  After that, one of the pending symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2c) shows that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. There is. The symbol variation display of this special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. In this effect example, even after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, no notice display regarding the big hit is displayed, but the notice display may be performed.

  After that, the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (2d), the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol (for example, "special figure B"). In accordance with this, "○" is displayed in the symbol changing notification region of the special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, since the symbols are still stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols that are out of “decoration 0-decoration 3-decoration 4”. Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2e), the characters of "challenge jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been hit are displayed, but the fact that the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is not performed Since there is a case where right-handedness is not performed, the character "Right-handed and pass through the jackpot occurrence gate!" Is displayed to urge the player to be careful of right-handedness. After that, when the game ball passes the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  Next, an example of an effect when a small hit is held consecutively in the probability variation game state will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect related to the display of the total number of winning prize balls centering on the decorative symbol display device. 37, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220. , And the universal figure holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a), 35 small hits and big hits including the first big hit occur, and the character "35th" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chan is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (a), it is shown that the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is being performed in the probability variation state. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed, and there is also no symbol variation display that is held. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 2.

  Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a), the character "small hit RUSH medium" indicating that it is in the probable state is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and below it. , "12215pt" is displayed as the total number of winning prize balls, and 12215 prize balls are won by winning from the first jackpot to the variable winning a prize hole (first variable winning a prize hole 234a, second variable winning a prize hole 235a). Has been shown.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 is a probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the probability changing state is provided with the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, although the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 2 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holding figures display area of special figure 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of the hold icons of special figure 1.

  In FIG. 37 (a), the four reserved icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special map 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special map 2, and these four reserved icons h21 of the special map 1 are displayed. All of h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is a round hold icon. In addition, the 1st hold and the 3rd hold are symbol variation displays that are small hits, and in FIG. 37 (a), the first symbol variation display that is small hits, for convenience of explanation. Also, the holding icons h21 and h23 of the third special drawing 2 are shown by hatching, but in reality, the same display mode as that of the holding icons h22 and h24 of the other special drawing 2 (circular unpatterned and white Display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of special figure 1. As described above, this is because the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 is a probable variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), so that the special figure 2 start port 232 is won, This is because many variable displays in FIG. 2 are executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (b), it is shown that the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is finished. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (b), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of being out of alignment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also “decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8” in accordance with this. It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of sync. In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "638".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (c), it is shown that the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 which is a small hit is being performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, instead of displaying "small hit RUSH in progress", the character "chance!" Is displayed to announce that a win (small hit or big hit) will occur. The character "chance!" May not be displayed, the character "chance!" May not be displayed, and "chance!" The character "" may be displayed without fail.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (d), the small hitting pattern (“special figure g”) is stopped and displayed, and in accordance with this, the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "666" in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative design. In the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, in the symbol variation notification area of the special figure 2, “Δ” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has been achieved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (e), it is shown that the small hit game has started. When the small hit game starts, the character "SMALL Bonus!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen to inform that the small hit game (or the 3R big hit game that looks like the small hit game) is being performed. The display of the number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen is updated to "36th time" to notify that it is the 36th consecutive chan. Also, in the upper left of the display screen, "decoration 6", which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit occurs, is displayed, and the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed. Has been done.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (f), one game ball enters the second variable winning port 235a by short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a, and 15 prize balls are acquired. The character "15/150 get!" Indicating that 150 prize balls can be expected to be won in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, no addition is made to the display of the total number of awarded prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (g), a state in which the small hitting game is finished by the entry of ten game balls into the second variable winning port 235a is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the characters “150/150 get!” Indicating that 150 prize balls can be expected to be obtained in this small hit are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Even at this point, no addition is made to the display of the total number of awarded balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. In addition, in this production example, the small variable hit is included in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is being held, and the character of "W-UP chance!" For notifying this is over the character of "SMALL bonus!". It is displayed in a wrap to give advance notice to the player that a holding consecutive chan will occur.

  After that, when the small hit game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 37 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probability variation state continues "small. The characters "RUSH RUSH CONTINUE!" Are displayed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size and moves to the upper right portion of the display screen to start the variable display. In addition, in this example of performance, since the continuous rendition is performed, the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not counted up, and the display is reversed and the count up display is displayed. Has been reserved. That is, “12215 pt”, which is the total number of winning prize balls before the occurrence of the small hit, remains. Further, the character display of "W-UP chance!" Is also continuously displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of award balls obtained during the small hitting game is not added to the small hitting game, and when a pending consecutive chan is generated, after the small hitting game is finished. The addition is reserved even after the symbol variable display is started. As a result, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the holding consecutive chan. In the present embodiment, when the total number of winning prize balls is not counted up, the reverse display is performed and the fact is notified. However, it may be displayed in another display mode. For example, a mosaic display may be performed to make it difficult to specify the current total number of winning prize balls.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (i) shows the state when the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 is finished after the end of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 37 (i), in the present embodiment, even after the small hit game (or the big hit game) is finished, the "small hit RUSH continuation! "W-UP chance!" Is also displayed continuously as well as the characters "" are continuously displayed, so that the small hit game is finished and the state is smoothly changed. The production is made to look like. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (i), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of being out of alignment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also displayed as "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration". It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of 8 ". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "718".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (j), it is shown that the small hit has ended and the second symbol variable display of special figure 2 is being performed. This symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is a small hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), in this effect example, the decoration pattern that is displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen is displayed before all the pattern variation displays held during the small hit are exhausted. It moves to the center and is enlarged. At this time, the decorative pattern which is being variably displayed overlaps the character “W-UP chance!”, But the decorative pattern which is being variably displayed may overlap the character “W-UP chance!”. . In addition, the display of the total number of the winning prize balls is still in the state where the count-up is reserved.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (l), the small hitting pattern (“special figure g”) is stopped and displayed, and the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8” is also stopped and displayed accordingly. . Further, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "888" in accordance with the decorative display that is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284, in the symbol variation notification area of the special figure 2, “Δ” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has been achieved. That is, it is shown that a small winning continuous rendition occurs.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (m), it is shown that the small hit game has started. When the small hit game starts, the word "SMALL bonus!" Is displayed in the center of the display screen to inform that the small hit game is being played and the number of consecutive chan displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. The display is updated to "37th time" to notify that it is the 37th consecutive chan. In addition, in the upper left of the display screen, "decoration 8", which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit occurs, is displayed, and the combination of "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8" is displayed. Has been done.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (n), one game ball enters the second variable winning port 235a by short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a, and 15 award balls are obtained. In addition to showing that 165 award balls have been obtained in addition to the number of award balls obtained in the previous small hit, it is shown that 300 award balls can be expected in this small hit together with the previous small hit. The characters "165/300 get!" Are displayed in the upper center of the display screen. That is, when a pending consecutive chan is generated, the number of prize balls obtained in the previous hit is summed up. At this point, no addition is made to the display of the total number of awarded prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (o), a state in which the small hitting game is finished by the entry of ten game balls into the second variable winning port 235a is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and are obtained in the last small hit. "300/300 get!" That indicates that you can expect to win 300 prize balls in addition to the previous one if you add up to 150 prize balls Is displayed in the upper center of the display screen. Even at this point, no addition is made to the display of the total number of awarded balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen.

  After that, when the small hitting game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 37 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probability variation state continues. The characters "RUSH RUSH CONTINUE!" Are displayed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size and moves to the upper right portion of the display screen to start the variable display. Also, the animation that the display of the total number of awarded balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen starts to count up, and the state where 300 award balls won in the two small win games are added is shown. Has been done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls won is not added and displayed after the first small hit game is finished, and the second small hit (that is, , The number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game relating to the small hits that have been held consecutively) is added together after the small hit game is finished. As a result, it may be possible to give the player a feeling of winning a large number of prize balls. After that, the total award ball count display is counted up as shown in FIGS. 24 (m) to (p), and as a result, as shown in FIG. 37 (q), 300 pieces are displayed in “12215pt”. "12515pt" to which the number of prize balls is added is displayed.

  In addition, in the example of the effect, the example in which the small hit is the continuous winning chan is shown. However, for example, a similar continuous winning chan effect (for example, “W-UP "Chance!", Etc.) may be displayed. With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the game distinctive by making it difficult to distinguish between the big hit and the small hit.

  Next, an example of an effect in the case where a big hit is a continuous rendition after a small hit in the probability variation game state will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect related to the display of the total number of winning prize balls centering on the decorative symbol display device. 38, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220. , And the universal figure holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a), 35 small hits and big hits including the first big hit occur, and the character "35th time" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chan is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (a), it is shown that the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is being performed in the probability variation state. On the other hand, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed, and there is also no symbol variation display that is held. Then, in the probability variation state, unlike the normal game state or the electric support state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 2.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a), the character "small hit RUSH medium" indicating that it is in the probable state is displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen, and below it. , "12215pt" is displayed as the total number of winning prize balls, and 12215 prize balls are won by winning from the first jackpot to the variable winning a prize hole (first variable winning a prize hole 234a, second variable winning a prize hole 235a). Has been shown.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears in the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 38 is a probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the probability changing state is provided with the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, although the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, the hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 2 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the number of holding figures display area of special figure 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lights of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represented also by the number of the hold icons of special figure 1.

  In FIG. 38 (a), the four reserved icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special map 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special map 2, and these four reserved icons h21 of the special map 1 are displayed. All of h22, h23, and h24 are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is a round hold icon. The first hold is a symbol variation display that is a small hit, and the third hold is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. In FIG. 38 (a), for convenience of description, the first holding icon h21, which is a symbol variation display that is a small hit, is hatched, and the third holding icon h23 is a symbol variation display, which is a big hit. Is shown with cross hatching, but in reality, it has the same display mode (the circular unpatterned and white display mode) as the other holding icons h22 and h24 of FIG. The same applies to the following description.

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of special figure 1. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 38 is a probable variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), it is special by making the special figure 2 starting port 232 win. This is because many variable displays in FIG. 2 are executed. 38 (a) to FIG. 38 (f) are different from FIG. 38 (a) to FIG. 38 (f) except that the symbol fluctuation display of the third special figure 2 that is held is a big hit. The description is omitted because it is the same as

  At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (g), a state in which the small hitting game is finished by entering 10 game balls into the second variable winning port 235a is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the characters “150/150 get!” Indicating that 150 prize balls can be expected to be obtained in this small hit are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. Even at this point, no addition is made to the display of the total number of awarded balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. In addition, in this production example, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that is being held includes a big hit, and the character "Large Bonus Super Heat!" That indicates this is over the character "SMALL Bonus!" It is displayed in a wrap to give advance notice to the player that a holding consecutive chan will occur.

  After that, when the small hitting game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the probability variation state continues. The characters "RUSH RUSH CONTINUE!" Are displayed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size and moves to the upper right portion of the display screen to start the variable display. In addition, in this example of performance, since the continuous rendition is performed, the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen is not counted up, and the display is reversed and the count up display is displayed. Has been reserved. That is, “12215 pt”, which is the total number of winning prize balls before the occurrence of the small hit, remains. In addition, the character display of "Big bonus super intense heat!" Is continuously displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of award balls obtained during the small hitting game is not added to the small hitting game, and when a pending consecutive chan is generated, after the small hitting game is finished. The addition is reserved even after the symbol variable display is started. As a result, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the holding consecutive chan.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (i) shows a state when the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 is finished after the end of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 38 (i), in the present embodiment, even after the small hit game (or the big hit game) is over, the "small hit RUSH continues!" By continuing to display the character "" and also displaying the character "Large bonus super intense heat!", It is possible to smoothly transition to the probability change state after the small hit game is over. The production is performed as if it were present. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (i), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of being out of alignment, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also displayed as "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration". It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns that are out of 8 ". In addition, the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "718".

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (j), it is shown that the small hit has ended and the second symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is being performed. This symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (k), in this effect example, the decoration pattern that is displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen is displayed before all of the symbol variation display that is held during the small hit is exhausted. The display is enlarged by moving to the center, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach effect is started. At this time, the decorative pattern which is being variably displayed overlaps the character "Large Bonus Super Heat!", But the decorative pattern which is being variably displayed is overlapped with the character "Big Bonus Super Heat!" Good. In addition, the display of the total number of the winning prize balls is still in the state where the count-up is reserved.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (l), the jackpot pattern (“special figure e”) is stopped and displayed, and in accordance with this, it is notified that the 10R probability variation jackpot is confirmed for “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”. The combination of jackpot decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. In addition, the mini-symbol is also stopped and displayed at "333" in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative design. Incidentally, in the symbol fluctuation notification region of the special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol / holding number display region 284, "○" is stopped and displayed, which means that the big hit has occurred. That is, a state in which a pending jackpot for a big hit has occurred is shown. Eventually, in FIG. 38 (m), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "big chance big hit" is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) for celebrating the big hit, and a string displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen. The number-of-changs display is updated to "37th time" to notify that it is the 37th consecutive time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (n), it is shown that the game of the first round is being played. When the process moves to the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character "Mr. Ochano congratulations!" Along with the character of Ms. Machiko on the slightly left side of the center of the display screen, celebrating that the 10R probability change big hit. . Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen, "decoration 3" which is a jackpot decorative pattern when the jackpot is hit is displayed. In addition, a display of "1R", which is the current number of rounds, is displayed as the number of rounds display in the upper center of the display screen. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (n), two game balls enter the second variable winning port 235a by opening the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning port 235a, and 30 prize balls are obtained. In addition to showing that the total number of prize balls obtained in the previous small hit was 180, and that in this big hit, 1650 prize balls can be expected to be included in addition to the previous small hit. The character “180/1650 get!” Is displayed below the display of the number of rounds. That is, when a pending consecutive chan is generated, the number of prize balls obtained in the previous hit is summed up. At this point, no addition is made to the display of the total number of awarded prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen.

  FIG. 38 (o) shows that 10 game balls have entered the second variable winning port 235a in the 10th round, so that the 10th round ends and the big hit end effect is performed. Since the big hit this time is the 10R sure-change big hit, the characters "small hit RUSH continued!" Indicating that the sure-change state continues will be displayed. In the big hit game of this time, 11 game balls enter the second variable winning port 235a in a certain round (for example, the third round), and an over-win is generated. "1665 / 1650get!", Which indicates that 1665 award balls will be won by adding to the 150 awards obtained in 1) and that 1650 award balls can be expected in this big hit together with the previous small hit. The characters are displayed in the upper center of the display screen. In other words, since the number of prize balls generated by over-winning is also included, the number of prize balls actually acquired is displayed more than the number of prize balls expected to be won in the previous small hit and big hit this time. Will be done. The number of prize balls generated by over-winning may not be included. Also, at this point in time, no addition is made to the display of the total number of won prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen.

  After that, when the big hit game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 38 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "small hit RUSH continue!" Along with the display, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size and moved to the upper right portion of the display screen to start the variable display. Also, the animation of the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen starts to count up, and 1665 prize balls obtained in the previous small hit game and this big hit game are added. Is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls won is not added and displayed after the first small hitting game is finished, and a big hit 2 (2) generated thereafter. That is, together with the number of award balls obtained in the big hit game related to the pending continuous change big hit), they are collectively added after the end of the small hit game. As a result, it may be possible to give the player a feeling of winning a large number of prize balls. After that, the total award ball count display is counted up in the manner shown in FIGS. 24 (m) to 24 (p), and as a result, as shown in FIG. "13880pt" to which the number of prize balls is added is displayed. In this production example, since the number of prize balls to be added is as large as 1665, it is shown that the animation continues from the end of the big hit game to the execution of the ninth symbol variable display, for example. There is. In this case, even if the holding of the four symbol variable displays is exhausted, the small display of the decorative symbols may be continued in the upper right portion of the display screen until the total number of the award balls has been counted up. .

  In the present embodiment, when the pending consecutive chan occurs, the total number of winning prize balls is displayed for the number of prize balls obtained in the big hit game (small hit game) related to the previous hit (big hit / small hit). I did not count it, but I summarized it with the number of award balls obtained in the big hit game (small hit game) related to the subsequent hit, and it was counted up after the end of the hit game related to the latter hit, Therefore, if the next big hit is guaranteed by the probability change, the number of award balls won in the big hit game related to the previous probability change big hit is not counted in the display of the total number of award balls, and the subsequent big hit is In the case of a normal big hit, after the big hit game relating to the big hit is finished, the number of award balls acquired may be collectively counted up in the display of the total number of award balls.

  In addition, in this production example, an example in which two consecutive chans are generated in the hold has been described, but when the number of retained consecutive chans is three or more, similarly, in the same manner, the last consecutive consecutive chan is generated (big hit). After the hit game for (small hit) is completed, the number of prize balls obtained in the series of hit games may be collectively counted up in the display of the total number of won prize balls.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the example of the effect of the small continuous holding continuous chan and the example of the large continuous holding chan are explained in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, but the combination of the large decorative pattern and the small decorative pattern Since some of the combinations are common, for example, when the big hit and the small hit are made, the effect on the display is performed in the same mode or a similar mode to identify which hit has occurred. You may make it difficult. Specifically, for example, the effect in the case of a big hit is set as shown in FIG. 37 (l) to FIG. 37 (o) so that the small hits appear to be continuous, or the small hit occurs. 38 (l) to FIG. 38 (n), it is possible to make the appearance in such a case appear as if the big hits (for example, 3R certainty variation big hits) are continuous.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when a suspended consecutive chan is generated, the total number of award balls to be won is collectively counted up. However, for example, when a certain condition is satisfied, a suspended consecutive chan is generated. In this case, it may be possible to allow the total number of award balls to be counted up in a lump. For example, when the player has consecutively chanted a certain number of times (for example, 10 consecutive chans), a suspended consecutive chan is generated thereafter. In this case, the total number of total winning prize balls may be counted up at once, or the condition can be set by the player, and if the set conditions are met, the total number of total winning prize balls is counted up. May be performed collectively.

In the above description,
“Demonstration means capable of executing a plurality of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A plurality of game ball detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
When the setting change operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. It is possible to set any one of the plurality of settings by pressing the change button 194],
One of the plurality of game ball detection means is a game ball detection means, which is an out ball detection means [for example, an out ball detection sensor SWout, etc.],
The out-ball detecting means is a means for detecting at least a game ball that has entered an out-mouth [for example, the out-mouth 240 or the like],
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first setting suggestive effect [for example, a Gol grandpa character shown in FIG. 25 (1e), in which a shoji opens and smokes a cigarette with a balloon of “high setting!”. GLG appears and at least suggests to the player that the setting is high].
The first setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the selected setting of the plurality of settings [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), the shoji opens and "high setting!" It suggests that the first setting suggestion effect in which the Gol-grandpa character GLG who smokes a cigarette appears with the speech balloon is setting 4 or more, etc.],
The first setting suggestion effect is started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in association with the detection result of the out-ball detecting means [for example, in step S501 of FIG. 15, the game ball passes at least the out-ball detecting sensor SWout. The setting suggestion point (P) to be counted becomes 3000 or more, and the condition is satisfied when the suggestion production execution lottery is won, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
I explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the plurality of effects. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of productions, or may not execute a plurality of productions.

  Further, the plurality of game ball detecting means may detect only that the game ball has passed, or may detect something other than that the game ball has passed. Further, the plurality of game ball detection means may be one that always detects that the game ball has passed, or may not detect that the game ball has passed.

  Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected, and when the setting change operation is accepted, at least the jackpot probability is different. A setting other than any one setting may be selected from a plurality of settings. Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected without fail, and when the setting change operation is accepted, at least the jackpot probability is different. There may be a case where one of the settings is not selected from the plurality of settings.

  Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, any one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings that differ only in the jackpot probability, and when the setting change operation is accepted, the probability other than the jackpot probability is also set. Any one setting may be selected from a plurality of different settings.

  Further, only when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or at least when the setting change operation is not accepted. Any one setting may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities.

  Further, the out-ball detecting means may detect only a game ball that has entered the out-mouth, or may detect a game ball other than the game ball that has entered the out-mouth. Further, the out-ball detecting means may be one that always detects the game ball that has entered the out-mouth, or may not detect the game ball that has entered the out-mouth.

  In addition, the first setting suggesting effect may suggest only a selected setting among the plurality of settings, or suggest a setting other than the selected setting among the plurality of settings. May be In addition, the first setting suggestive effect may be something that always suggests about the selected setting of the plurality of settings, or may not suggest about the selected setting of the plurality of settings. It may be.

  Further, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or effects other than the first setting suggestion effect when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. May also be started. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, and the first setting suggestion effect is not started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. There may be cases.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, and the first setting suggestion is also applied when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied. The presentation may be started.

  Further, the first effect execution condition may be satisfied only in association with the detection result of the out-ball detecting means, or may be satisfied in association with a result other than the detection result of the out-ball detecting means. May be Further, the first effect execution condition may be always satisfied in connection with the detection result of the out-ball detecting means, or may not be satisfied in connection with the detection result of the out-ball detecting means. It may be.

In addition, "provided with a control means [for example, main control unit 300 or the like] capable of starting one of the plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), etc.],
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a big hit game state, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), an electric support state (special figure low probability) State general figure high probability state) etc.],
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first setting suggestive effect may be started in the first gaming state,
The first setting suggestive effect may be started in the second game state,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the control means may be capable of starting only one of the plurality of gaming states, or may start a gaming state other than one of the plurality of gaming states. It may be. Further, the control means may always start one of the plurality of gaming states, or may not start one of the plurality of gaming states.

  Further, the control means may be capable of starting only the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and may also start gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. May be. Further, the control means may always start the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not start the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

  Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that is always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that may be more disadvantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, there may be a case where only the first setting suggestion effect is started in the first game state, and an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state. Good. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started in the first gaming state, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started in the first gaming state.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only in the first gaming state, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started in a gaming state other than the first gaming state. It may be.

  Further, only the first setting suggestive effect may be started in the second gaming state, or effects other than the first setting suggesting effect may be started in the second gaming state. Good. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started in the second game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started in the second game state.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only in the second game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started in a game state other than the second game state. It may be.

In addition, there is a case where the first setting suggestion effect is started during a period in which the symbol variation display is not executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (4b), the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the customer waiting demonstration effect. Execution of performance has started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only the first setting suggestive effect is started in a period in which the symbol variation display is not executed, and other than the first setting suggesting effect in the period in which the symbol variation display is not executed. The production may also be started. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed, and the first setting suggestion effect may not be started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed. Good.

  In addition, the first setting suggestion production may be started only during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed, and the first setting suggestion may be performed during the period other than the period when the symbol variation display is not executed. The production may be started in some cases.

Further, "one of the plurality of game ball detection means is a game ball detection means is a first game ball detection means,
The first game ball detection means is a certain area [for example, the first variable winning port 234a, the second variable winning port 235a, the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, the first special figure starting port (Bottom) 231, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the big hit generation gate 252, etc.] is a means for detecting a game ball that has entered,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied in association with the detection result of the first game ball detection means,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first game ball detection means may detect only the game ball that has entered a certain region, or it may detect the game ball that has entered a region other than the certain region. Good. Further, the first game ball detection means may be a device that always detects a game ball that has entered a certain region, or may not detect a game ball that has entered a certain region. Good.

  Further, the first effect execution condition may be satisfied only in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detection means, or may be a result other than the detection result of the first game ball detection means. May also be established in association. Further, the first effect execution condition may be always satisfied in connection with the detection result of the first game ball detection means, or may be related to the detection result of the first game ball detection means. There may be cases where the above does not hold.

Further, "If the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), the condition is satisfied. The first setting suggestion production is being executed at the time when
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a second timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (5c), the condition is satisfied, but SP When the reach is in progress, the first setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach ends, etc.],
The first timing and the second timing are different timings,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing, or when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, There may be a case where an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect is started at one timing. Further, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started at the first timing, and if the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing. There may be a case where one setting suggestion effect is not started.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only at the first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or when the first effect execution condition is satisfied The first setting suggesting effect may be started at a timing other than the timing. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied. However, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing.

  Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing, or when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the second effect There may be a case where an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect is started at the timing of. Further, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started at the second timing, or if the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing. There may be a case where one setting suggestion effect is not started.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, The first setting suggesting effect may be started at a timing other than the timing. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied. However, the first setting suggesting effect may be started at the second timing.

  Further, the first timing and the second timing may be partially different timings, and the first timing and the second timing may be entirely different timings.

In addition, “one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestive effect [for example, the display of the sabotani group shown in FIG. 26 (1a)],
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect different from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect, etc.],
Both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect may be in a state of being executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (1a), the display of the sabotani group and the first setting suggestion effect]. Etc. are performed at the same time],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestive effect may be started only during execution of a certain effect, or may be started during execution of an effect other than the certain effect. It may be one. The second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, there may be a case where only both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are being executed, and other than both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. There may be a case where the effect of is also being executed. Further, both the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect may be always executed, or both the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect are being executed. There may be cases where there is no state.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestive effect [for example, a display of the sabotani group shown in FIG. 26 (2a)],
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect different from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect, etc.],
The first effect execution condition is set in a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain period [for example, a period in which the jackpot end effect is executed]”). When it is materialized, the said 1st setting suggestion production is started after this certain period of time [For example, as shown in FIG.26 (2a)-(2b), jackpot termination production is performed. The first setting suggestion effect is not started during the period when the jackpot is finished, and the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started after the jackpot end effect is finished],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestive effect may be started only during the execution of a certain effect, or may be started other than during the execution of a certain effect. It may be. The second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a certain period (a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed), the first setting suggestion effect is obtained after the certain period has elapsed. May be started, or when the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, effects other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed. Further, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect during the certain period. When the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestive effect may not be started after the certain period has elapsed.

  Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect during the certain period. When the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started even after the certain period of time has elapsed. In addition, only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect during the certain period. Even when the execution condition is not satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period of time has elapsed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestive effect [for example, a display of the sabotani group shown in FIG. 26 (2a)],
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect different from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect, etc.],
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed [for example, a period during which the jackpot end effect is executed], the first setting suggestion The production does not start,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestive effect may be started only during execution of a certain effect, or may be started during execution of an effect other than the certain effect. It may be one. The second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period when the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, only the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. When the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period when the suggestive effect may be executed, effects other than the first setting suggestive effect may not be started. Further, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period when the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not necessarily be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period when the suggestive effect may be executed, the first setting suggestive effect may be started.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period when the second setting suggestion effect is being executed, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. The first setting suggestion effect may not be started even when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied during a period when the suggestion effect is being executed. Further, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied only during a period when the second setting suggestion effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. The first setting suggestion effect may not be started even when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period other than the period in which the suggestion effect may be executed.

Further, “attainment degree suggesting means for suggesting at least the achievement degree of the first effect execution condition [for example, display by a point gauge PTG shown in FIG. 25 (1a)] is provided.
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the achievement degree suggesting means may indicate only the achievement degree of the first effect execution condition, or may indicate something other than the achievement degree of the first effect execution condition. Further, the achievement level suggesting means may necessarily indicate the achievement level of the first effect execution condition, or may not indicate the achievement level of the first effect execution condition. .

Also, in the above description,
"A game table provided with a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
When the setting change operation is accepted, any one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected [for example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. It is possible to set any one of the plurality of settings by pressing the change button 194],
One of the plurality of effects is a first notification effect [for example, the number of perforations display image shown in FIG. 28 (1b)],
The first notification effect is an effect including at least a notification about a game [for example, a display of the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit]
The first notification effect is an effect that may include a suggestion regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings [for example, the characters “4560pt get !!” shown in FIG. 28 (2d) are displayed. It is suggested that the setting is 4 or more by displaying the image for displaying the number of drills, etc.],
The first notification effect is an effect that may not include a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings [for example, the characters “2000pt get !!” shown in FIG. 28 (2b). The total number of winning prize balls is highlighted by displaying the number of perforations display including, but the setting has not been suggested, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
I explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, the first notification effect may include a setting suggestion, and the first notification effect may be focused.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may not execute a plurality of effects.

  Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected, and when the setting change operation is accepted, at least the jackpot probability is different. Other than any one setting may be selected from the plurality of settings. Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected without fail, and when the setting change operation is accepted, at least the jackpot probability is different. There may be a case where one of the settings is not selected from the plurality of settings.

  Further, when the setting change operation is accepted, any one of the settings may be selected from a plurality of settings that differ only in the jackpot probability, and when the setting change operation is accepted, the probability other than the jackpot probability is also set. Any one setting may be selected from a plurality of different settings. Further, only when the setting change operation is accepted, at least one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or at least when the setting change operation is not accepted. Any one setting may be selected from a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities.

  In addition, the first notification effect may include only a notification regarding the game, or may include a notification other than the notification regarding the game. In addition, the first notification effect may always include a notification regarding a game, or may not include a notification regarding a game.

  Further, the first notification effect may include only a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or other than a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. It may also include a thing. Further, the first notification effect may always include a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may not include a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. There may be

  In addition, the first notification effect may be an effect that may not include only a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or other than a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. It may be an effect that may not include the thing. In addition, the first notification effect may be an effect that does not necessarily include a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or when a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings is included. There may be some production.

In addition, "the first notification effect is an effect that may be executed in a manner in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included [for example, the number of drills shown in FIG. 28 (2d) is displayed. The image is displayed when the total number of won balls is 2000 or 3000, whereas the image is displayed when the number of balls is not the number as in the case of "4560pt get !!" By displaying it, it is possible to recognize that it is a setting suggestion],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be executed only in a manner in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included, or that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. It may be executed in a manner other than the identifiable manner. Further, the first notification effect may be always executed in a mode in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included, or a mode in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. May not be executed in.

  Note that it may not be possible to identify that the first notification effect includes a suggestion regarding the setting. Further, the first notification effect executed at the first timing may include a setting suggestion.

Further, in the “first case [for example, when the total number of award balls is 2000 shots, etc.], the first notification effect that does not include a suggestion regarding the setting is started [for example, in FIG. 28 (1b). As shown, an image of the number of perforations of "2000pt get !!" is displayed, etc.],
In the first case, the first notification effect including suggestions regarding the setting is not started,
In the second case [for example, when the total number of awarded balls is 4560], the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started [for example, in FIG. 28 (2d). As shown, a drill number display image including a setting suggestion of “4560pt get !!” is displayed],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to make expectations for the setting suggestion depending on the timing at which the first notification effect is executed.

  Here, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion about the setting in the first case may be started, and there may be effects other than the first informative effect that does not include the suggestion about the setting in the first case. It may be started. Further, in the first case, the first notification effect that does not include the setting suggestion may be started without fail, and in the first case, the first notification effect that does not include the setting suggestion may not be started. It may be.

  In addition, the first notification effect that does not include a suggestion about the setting may be started only in the first case, or the first notification effect that does not include a suggestion about the setting in a case other than the first case is It may be started.

  Further, it is not necessary to start only the first notification effect including the setting-related suggestions in the first case, and effects other than the first notification effect including the setting-related suggestions in the first case. May not even be started. In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not necessarily be started in the first case, and the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started in the first case. There may be occasions.

  In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started only in the first case, and the first notice including the suggestion regarding the setting may be included in cases other than the first case. The effect does not have to be started.

  Further, there may be a case where only the first notification effect including the setting-related suggestions is started in the second case, and effects other than the first notification effect including the setting-related suggestions in the second case. May also be started. In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be always started in the second case, and the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case may not be started. Good.

  Further, there may be a case where the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is started only in the second case, and the first notice including the suggestion regarding the setting also in the cases other than the second case. The production may be started in some cases. Further, there may be a case where the first notification effect that includes only the suggestion regarding the setting is started in the second case, and the first notification effect that also includes the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case. May be started.

In addition, "the first notification effect that does not include a suggestion regarding the setting in the second case is not started,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, it is not necessary to start only the first notification effect that does not include the setting information in the second case, or the first notification effect that does not include the setting value in the second case. Other productions may not be started. In addition, the first notification effect that does not include a setting suggestion in the second case may not always be started, and the first notification effect that does not include a setting suggestion in the second case is May be started.

  In addition, the first notification effect that does not include only the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case may not be started, and the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case is not included. The notification effect may not be started. In addition, the first notification effect that does not include a setting suggestion only in the second case may not be started, and the setting suggestion is not included in a case other than the second case as well. The notification effect may not be started.

In addition, "certain conditions [for example, winning the execution lottery, being within a specific number of revolutions after the jackpot (for example, 30 revolutions), being a specific day of the week, conditions set by the player, etc.] In the second case that has been established, the first notification effect including suggestions regarding the setting is started,
Even in the second case, if the certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting is not started,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first notification effect that includes a suggestion about the setting may be started in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, or a suggestion about the setting may be included in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied. Effects other than the first notification effect may be started. Further, the first notification effect that includes a suggestion about the setting may be started in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, or the suggestion about the setting may be included in a second case where the certain condition is satisfied. The first notification effect may not be started in some cases.

  Further, in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, the first notification effect that includes only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, and in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied, a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. The first notification effect including “” may be started. In addition, the first notification effect that includes a suggestion about the setting may be started only in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, and the first notification effect related to the setting is also performed in a case other than the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. The first notification effect including the suggestion may be started.

  Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, only the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting may not be started, or even in the second case. When a certain condition is not satisfied, the effects other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not necessarily be started, or even in the second case. When a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started.

  Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including only the setting suggestion may not be started, or even in the second case. When a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Further, even in the second case, the first notification effect including the setting suggestion may not be started only when a certain condition is not satisfied, or in the second case, The first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started in a case other than the case where the condition is not satisfied.

In addition, "the first notification effect is an effect related to at least a big hit [for example, total winning prize balls, re-lottery effect when a big hit, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be only related to the big hit or may be related to other than the big hit. In addition, the first notification effect may or may not always relate to a big hit.

Further, “In the first notification effect, a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings is made according to the display mode of the numbers [for example, as shown in FIG. Change the display mode of the numbers in, to suggest settings, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of discomfort by directly using the timing or the numbers and to pay attention to the suggestion regarding the setting.

  Here, in the first notification effect, only the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be performed depending on the number display mode, and in the first notification effect, the plurality of settings may be changed depending on the number display mode. Suggestions other than suggestions regarding the selected one of the settings may also be made. Further, in the first notification effect, a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be always made depending on the number display mode, and in the first notification effect, a plurality of settings may be set depending on the number display mode. In some cases, no suggestion may be made regarding the selected setting of the.

  Further, in the first notification effect, suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be made only by the display mode of the numbers, and in the first notification effect, other than the display mode of the numbers. Suggestions regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings may be made. Further, only in the first notification effect, suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be made by the display mode of the numbers, and also in the effects other than the first notification effect, the display mode of the numbers May suggest a selected setting of the plurality of settings.

In addition, “The probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed is different depending on the selected setting of the plurality of settings [for example, the suggestion of setting by the drill number display image is , The execution lottery is performed based on the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table provided for each setting, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, depending on the selected setting of the plurality of settings, only the probability that the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting is executed may differ, or depending on the selected setting of the plurality of settings. , The probability other than the probability that the first notification effect including the setting suggestion is executed may be different. In addition, depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting may be different, or depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, There may be a case where the probabilities that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed are not different.

  Further, depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, the probability that only the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting may be different, or depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, The probabilities that the effects other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting are executed may be different. In addition, depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including only a suggestion regarding the setting may be executed may differ, or depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, The probabilities that the first notification effect including suggestions other than the settings are executed may be different.

  Further, the probability that the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different only depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or other than the selected setting among the plurality of settings. Depending on the setting, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different.

In addition, “one of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect [for example, a re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 27],
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which once the result of the big hit is displayed in the decorative symbol variable display, the decorative symbol variable display is restarted, and then the result of the big hit is displayed again [for example, FIG. As shown in (a) to (d) of the figure, the re-lottery effect is temporarily stopped by a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", and then the decorative symbols are variably displayed again. Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "is a production that may be changed to a combination of jackpot decorative patterns],
In the re-lottery effect, the result of the big hit suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming the first advantageous state [for example, the electric support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state etc. after the big hit game ends) (hereinafter, " The first big hit result [eg, a combination of decoration patterns of big hits, such as "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", which suggests that it may be a normal big hit. ])) Is once displayed and then becomes a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state [for example, a probability change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state) after the jackpot game is finished]. When displaying the result of the big hit to notify that [for example, a combination of big hit decorative patterns such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" to notify that the probability change is confirmed] (hereinafter, "the third case ").
In the re-lottery effect, the first jackpot result [for example, a combination of decoration patterns of jackpots of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1"] is displayed once and then the first jackpot result [eg, There is a case (“hereinafter, referred to as a“ fourth case ”)” of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, etc.
In the re-lottery effect, the first notification effect [for example, display of the effect display EF shown in FIG. 27 (c) or FIG. 27 (c ″)] may be executed,
The first notification effect executed in the third case does not include a suggestion regarding the setting [for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), in the re-lottery effect, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" The effect display EF, which is displayed when the promotion is successful, such as "from" to "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" informs that the symbol has been promoted, etc.],
The first notification effect executed in the fourth case includes a suggestion regarding the setting [for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (c ''), in the re-lottery effect, "decoration 1-decoration 1- The effect display EF displayed when the promotion fails, such as “decoration 1” to “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” includes the effect of setting suggestion, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the re-lottery effect, after displaying the third case (the first jackpot result (the result of the jackpot suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming the first advantageous state) once, it is displayed from the first advantageous state. The case of displaying the result of the big hit for notifying that the second advantageous state is advantageous) may be provided, or the re-lottery effect may be other than the third case. Further, in the re-lottery effect, there may be the third case without exception, and in the re-lottery effect, the case may not always be the third case.

  In the re-lottery effect, there may be only the fourth case (when the first jackpot result is once displayed and then the first jackpot result is displayed again). There may be cases other than cases. In addition, in the re-lottery effect, the fourth case may always occur, and in the re-lottery effect, the fourth case may not exist.

  Further, only the first notification effect may be executed in the re-lottery effect, or an effect other than the first notification effect may be executed in the re-lottery effect. Further, the first notification effect may be always executed in the re-lottery effect, or the first notification effect may not be executed in the re-lottery effect. Further, the first notification effect may be executed only in the re-lottery effect, or the first notification effect may be executed in an effect other than the re-lottery effect.

  Further, the first notification effect executed in the third case may not include only the suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the third case may include a suggestion regarding the setting other than the suggestion regarding the setting. Suggestions may not be included. Further, the first notification effect executed in the third case may not necessarily include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the third case may include a suggestion regarding the setting. There may be cases where

  Further, the first notification effect executed only in the third case may not include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the cases other than the third case is the setting. May not include a suggestion regarding.

  Further, the first notification effect executed in the fourth case may include only a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the fourth case indicates a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting. May also be included. Further, the first notification effect executed in the fourth case may always include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the fourth case may include a suggestion regarding the setting. There may be no cases.

  Further, the first notification effect executed only in the fourth case may include a suggestion about the setting, and the first notification effect executed in the cases other than the fourth case is also related to the setting. Suggestions may be included.

In addition, “one of the above-mentioned effects is an effect of displaying the total number of won prize balls [for example, a display of the total number of won prize balls shown in FIG. 28],
The total prize ball count display is a display of at least the total prize ball count obtained in the jackpot game,
The first notification effect is an effect executed in the effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls,
When the total number of award winning balls display is a first number [for example, 2000, etc.], the first notification effect that does not include a suggestion regarding the setting [for example, “shown in FIG. "Display including a number display image such as" 2000 get pt !! "
The first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started when the total prize ball count display indicates a second number [eg, 4560] [eg, FIG. (2d) A display including a number-of-cuts display image such as “4560pt get !!”],
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be executed only in the effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls, or may be executed in an effect other than the effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls. May be. In addition, the first notification effect may be always executed in the effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls, or may not be executed in the effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls. .

  Further, when the total acquisition award ball number display indicates the first number, only the first notification effect that does not include a setting-related suggestion may be started, or the total acquisition award ball number display may be the first. Effects other than the first notification effect, which does not include a setting-related suggestion, may be started. In addition, when the total acquisition award ball count display indicates the first number, the first notification effect that does not include a suggestion regarding the setting may be started without fail, or the total acquisition award ball count display may be the first. There is a case in which the first notification effect, which does not include a setting-related suggestion, is not started in the case of indicating that the number is 1.

  In addition, when the total acquisition award ball count display indicates the first number, the first notification effect that does not include only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquisition award ball count display may be the first. The first notification effect that does not include any suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started when it is indicated that the number is. In addition, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only when the total acquisition award ball number display indicates the first number, or the total acquisition award ball number display is the first. The first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started in a case other than the case of indicating that the number is 1.

  In addition, when the total acquisition award ball count display indicates the second number, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, and the total acquisition award ball count display may be performed. There may be a case where an effect other than the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting is started when indicates that the number is a second number. Further, when the total acquisition award ball number display indicates a second number, the first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting may be always started, or the total acquisition award ball number display may be the second. There may be a case where the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is not started in the case of indicating the number.

  In addition, when the total acquisition award ball number display indicates the second number, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquisition award ball number display May indicate the second number, the first notification effect including a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. Further, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only when the total acquisition award ball number display indicates the second number, and the total acquisition award ball number display may be performed. There may be a case where the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is started in a case other than the case where indicates the second number.

  Further, the first number and the second number may be partially different numbers, or may be entirely different numbers.

Also, in the above description,
[First symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display [for example, first special symbol display device 212 or the like],
Second symbol display means [eg, second special symbol display device 214 or the like] capable of executing the second symbol variable display,
Display means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
An attacker in which a game ball can be won [eg, a first variable winning port 234a, a second variable winning port 235a],
Fluctuation time determination means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display [for example, the CPU 304 or the like of the main control unit 300],
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with,
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212]. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be simultaneously performed, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in the normal gaming state, the first feature is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable display of the decorative symbols in accordance with the variable display of the symbols on the diagram display device 212],
The attacker is capable of changing the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display [for example, "special figure g" in the second special figure display device 214 is A small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed a maximum of 12 times when a stop display is made and a small hit is executed, etc.],
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
In the period from the start of the first symbol variation display until the variation time determined by the variation time determination means elapses, the attacker is the second in accordance with the result of the second symbol variation display. In the case of being in a state (hereinafter, referred to as “first case [eg, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second special interval is displayed in the first special symbol display device 212 from the start to the stop display) The special figure display device 214 is a "small figure g", which is a small hit and is in a small hit game state in which the second variable winning port 235a is opened / closed. ").
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, the pre-reading notice effect during the period shown in FIG. 34 (j)].
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice to be executed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (j), the pre-read notice effect is "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration". It is performed during shaking fluctuations in the combination of decorative patterns that are out of 1 "],
In the first case, a period corresponding to a period in which the attacker is in the second state [for example, a period from the start to the end of the small hit game as shown in FIG. 14 (b)] (Hereinafter, "a certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), an interruption period (for example, a small hit in Special Fig. 2 becomes a small hit after the original symbol fluctuation time elapses. During the period until the small hit game is finished, etc.), etc.] "), the first notice may be executed.
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notification means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the notification means.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variable display, or may be capable of performing a display other than the first symbol variable display. Further, the first symbol display means may always execute the first symbol variable display, or may not execute the first symbol variable display.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variable display, or may be capable of performing a display other than the second symbol variable display. Further, the second symbol display means may always execute the second symbol variable display, or may not execute the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

  Further, the attacker may be one in which only the game ball can win, or one other than the game ball may win. Further, the attacker may be one in which the game ball always wins, or one in which the game ball may not win.

  Further, the variation time determining means may determine only the variation time of the first symbol variation display, or may determine the variation time other than the variation time of the first symbol variation display. Good. Further, the variation time determination means may be one that always determines the variation time of the first symbol variation display, or may not determine the variation time of the first symbol variation display. .

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing a notice other than the plurality of notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

  Further, there may be a case where only both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time, and symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display The variable display may be executed at the same time. In addition, there may be a case where both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are always executed at the same time, and both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are simultaneously performed. It may not be done.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variable display, or the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variable display. A display other than the display may be displayable. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display in response to the execution of the first symbol variable display, or the decorative symbol variable display in response to the execution of the first symbol variable display. May not be displayed.

  Also, the attacker may be a state changeable only from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display, or depending on the result of the second symbol variation display. The state may be changeable from the first state to a state other than the second state. Also, the attacker may be one that surely changes state from the first state to the second state in accordance with the result of the second symbol variation display, and the first in accordance with the result of the second symbol variation display. The state may not change from the state of 2 to the second state.

  In the second state, only the game balls may be easier to win in the attacker than in the first state, and those other than the game balls may be easier to win in the attacker than in the first state. It may be. Also, the second state may be one in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than in the first state, or the game ball may be less likely to win the attacker than in the first state. May be

  Also, in the first case (in the period from the start of the first symbol variation display until the variation time determined by the variation time determination means elapses, the attacker is the first in accordance with the result of the second symbol variation display. There may be only two cases), or cases other than the first case. In addition, the first case may always exist, or the first case may not exist.

  The first notice may be executed only during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or may be displayed other than during the display of the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the first notice may be always executed during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be executed during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

  In the first case, only the first notice may be executed in a certain period (the period corresponding to the period in which the attacker is in the second state). A notice other than the first notice may be executed in a certain period. Further, in the first case, the first notice may be executed without fail in a certain period, and in the first case, the first notice may not be executed in a certain period. .

  In the first case, the first notice may be executed only in a certain period, and in the first case, the first notice may be given in a period other than the certain period. It may be executed. Further, only in the first case, the first notice may be executed in a certain period, and also in cases other than the first case, the first notice may be given in a certain period. It may be executed.

In addition, “the certain period is a period that starts after the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Is started at a timing later than the timing at which the small hit symbol such as "special drawing g" is displayed in the special drawing 2],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, a certain period may start only after the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed, or from the timing when the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed. Also, it may be started other than later. In addition, a certain period may be started without fail after the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed, or at a timing after the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed. It may not be started later.

In addition, “control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states [for example, the CPU 304 in the main controller 300, etc.] is provided,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), etc.],
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state [eg, a probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first gaming state is a first time [for example, 5 seconds],
At least the attacker in the first gaming state, the variation time of the second symbol variation display in which the result that the state will be changed to the second state is displayed is the second variation time [for example, 580 seconds Etc.],
The second fluctuation time is longer than the first fluctuation time,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is difficult to grasp the content of the decorative symbol variable display executed in association with the variation of the first symbol variable display and determine the timing of the prefetching notice, so the result of the decorative symbol variable display It may be possible to make the player have expectations without disturbing by starting after deriving.

  Here, the control means may be capable of controlling only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to a game state other than one of the plurality of game states. It may be anything. Further, the control means may be one that always controls one of the plurality of gaming states, or may not control one of the plurality of gaming states. Good.

  Further, the control means may be capable of controlling only in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or in the gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It may be one. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Good.

  Further, the second gaming state may be more advantageous than only the first gaming state, or may be more advantageous than gaming states other than the first gaming state. In addition, the second gaming state may be always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means in the first gaming state may be only the first variation time or may be other than the first variation time. . Further, the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means in the first gaming state may be the first variation time, or may not be the first variation time. Good.

  Further, at least the attacker in the first gaming state, the variation time of the second symbol variation display in which the result that the state will be changed to the second state is displayed may be only the second variation time. The variable time other than the second variable time may be used. Further, at least the attacker in the first gaming state, the variation time of the second symbol variation display in which the result that the state will be changed to the second state is displayed may be always the second variation time. The second variation time may not be the case.

Further, “In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the normal gaming state, Corresponding to the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display device 212, the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in correspondence with the execution of the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the normal gaming state, the second feature is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of the symbols on the diagram display device 214, the variable display of the decorative symbols is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first gaming state, only the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the first symbol variation display Corresponding to, a display other than the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed. Further, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display may be always displayed in correspondence with the execution of the first symbol variable display, and in the first gaming state, in the execution of the first symbol variable display. Correspondingly, the decorative pattern variable display may not be displayed.

  Further, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed only corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variable display, and in the first gaming state, other than the execution of the first symbol variable display. The decorative symbol variable display may be displayed corresponding to the execution of.

  Further, in the first gaming state, only the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variation display Corresponding to, the display other than the decorative pattern variable display may not be displayed. Further, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may not necessarily be displayed in correspondence with the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variation display There may be a case where the decorative pattern variable display is displayed corresponding to.

  Further, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed corresponding to only the execution of the second symbol variable display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variable display Corresponding to the execution other than, the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed.

In addition, in the case of "the first case, the first notice for the first symbol variation display that is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state may be executed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. 34 (j), the preliminary read-ahead notice effect is put on hold when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is interrupted due to a small hit in special figure 2). Pre-reading notice effect etc. for the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been performed],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first case, there may be a case where only the first notice for the first symbol variable display, which is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state, is executed. However, in the first case, even if a notice other than the first notice for the first symbol variable display, which is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state, may be executed. Good. In the first case, the first notice for the first symbol variation display, which is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state, may be executed without fail, and the first notice may be executed. In this case, there may be a case where the first notice for the first symbol variable display, which is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state, is not executed.

  Further, in the first case, there may be a case where the first notice is executed only for the first symbol variation display that is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state. , In the first case, there may be a case where the first notice for the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display that is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state is executed. Good. Also, only in the first case, there may be a case where the first notice for the first symbol variable display that is held when the attacker changes to the second state is executed. , Even in cases other than the first case, even if the first notice for the first symbol variable display that is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state may be executed. Good.

In addition, “the first notice is not a notice regarding the first symbol variation display being executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (a) to FIG. It is not a notice effect related to the variable display of special figure 1 which was interrupted as a small hit in special figure 2],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notice may not be a notice regarding only the first symbol variation display being executed, and may not be a notice regarding a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display being executed. The first notice may not necessarily be the notice relating to the first symbol variation display being executed, or may be the notice relating to the first symbol variation display being executed.

Further, in the "first case, in a period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is suspended but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and the period is After the end, the first symbol variation display is restarted [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (f) to FIG. 34 (h), a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and a small hit game relating to the small hit. In the period in which is executed, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended, but the variation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed when the small hit game ends. Resume, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the Only the first symbol variation display may be restarted, or in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is suspended but the decorative symbol variation display continues. The variable display other than the first variable display may be restarted after the end of the period. In the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the first symbol variation display is displayed. One symbol variation display may be restarted without fail, and in the first case, during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is suspended, but the decorative symbol variation display continues. It may be displayed and the first symbol variable display may not be restarted after the period ends.

  In the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and only after the period ends. The first symbol variation display may be restarted, and in the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is suspended, but the decorative symbol variation display continues. The first symbol variation display may be restarted even after the period is displayed and after the period ends. In the first case, only in the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is suspended, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the The first symbol variation display may be restarted, and in the first case, the first symbol variation display is interrupted even during the period other than the period in which the attacker is in the second state, but the decorative symbol variation display is It may be continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the first symbol variation display may be restarted.

  Also, only in the first case, in the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the The first symbol variation display may be restarted, and also in cases other than the first case, during the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is suspended, but the decorative symbol variation display May be continuously displayed, and the first symbol variation display may be restarted after the period ends.

In addition, "One of the plurality of notices is the second notice [for example, the big notice of special figure 2 in which characters of" big hit preparing! "Shown in FIG. 35 (d) are displayed, etc.] And
The second notice is a notice about the second symbol variation display being executed,
The second notice is a notice that may be started when the first symbol variation display is started during execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a jackpot [eg, FIG. As shown in (a) to (d) of the figure, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started during the execution of the symbol variable display which is a big hit on the second special symbol display device 214, "The big jackpot preparation in progress !!" is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to urge the player to stop firing during a useless period in which the big hit lottery is not performed for a long period of time.

  Here, the second notice may be related to only the second symbol variation display being executed, or may be related to a symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display being executed. Good. Further, the second notice may be always related to the second symbol variation display being executed, or may be not related to the second symbol variation display being executed.

  Further, the second notice may be started only when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit, It may be started in a case other than the case where the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display which is the result of the big hit. Further, the second notice may be always started when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display which is the result of the jackpot, and the result of the jackpot. It may not be started when the first symbol variable display is started during execution of the second symbol variable display.

  In addition, the second notice may be started when the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit, It may be started even when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit.

In addition, “the second notice may be executed across the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times [for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (d) to 35 (f), 2 The big hit notice of special figure 2 is given across the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 time]],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to show the look-ahead notice.

  Here, there may be a case where only the second notice is executed over the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times, or across the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times. In addition, a notice other than the second notice may be executed. Further, the second notice may be executed over the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times, or the second notice over the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times. In some cases, the notice may not be executed.

  In addition, there may be a case where the second notice is executed only over the first symbol variation display that is executed multiple times, or a symbol other than the first symbol variation display that is executed multiple times. The second notice may be executed over the variable display.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states [e.g., CPU 304 in the control unit 300],
An attacker in which a game ball can be won [eg, a first variable winning port 234a, a second variable winning port 235a],
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with,
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game [for example, "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 to be a small hit. If the second variable winning port 235a is opened and closed a maximum of 12 times, a small hit game is executed, etc.],
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state [eg, a probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a total winning prize number display [for example, the total winning prize number displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 37 (a)]. Display etc.]
The total prize ball count display is a display showing the total prize ball count obtained by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods advantageous to the player including the second game state [for example, The display of the total number of winning prize balls is displayed from the first big hit to the normal big hit until the electric support state which shifts after the big hit game related to the normal big hit is finished],
In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winnings may be added to the total number of prize balls display and displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 24 (j) to 24 (p), the game is won during a small hit game. The number of prize balls played is not counted in the display of the total winning prize balls during the small hit game, and is counted up after the end of the small hit game, etc.],
In the second gaming state, if a certain condition [for example, a holding consecutive chan, etc.] is met, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker. Even in such a case, after the second state is finished, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, and then the attacker Becomes the second state, and after the second state ends, addition of an unadded award ball number according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker to the total acquired award ball number display [E.g., as shown in FIGS. 37 (e) to 37 (q), when the small hits are held consecutively, even if the small hit game related to the first small hit ends, the first hit The number of prize balls won in the small hit game is not added to the display of the total number of won prize balls after the first small hit game is finished, After completion of the small hit game related to the second small hit, which is a Toruren Chan, the total number of award balls is displayed by adding up the number of award balls acquired in the first small hit game and the second small hit game. Counting up, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

  Here, the control means may be capable of controlling only one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to a game state other than one of the plurality of game states. It may be anything. Further, the control means may be one that always controls one of the plurality of gaming states, or may not control one of the plurality of gaming states. Good.

  Further, the attacker may be able to win only the game ball, or may be other than the game ball. Further, the attacker may be one in which the game ball always wins, or one in which the game ball may not win.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may display a plurality of displays without fail, or may not display the plurality of displays.

  Also, the attacker may only be able to change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game, or depending on the result of the game, a state other than the first state and the second state. Also, the state may be changeable. Also, the attacker may always change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game, or if the state does not change from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game. There may be.

  In addition, the second state may be a state in which the game balls are easier to win in the attacker than in the first state, or the game balls are in a state in which it is easier to win a game other than the attacker than in the first state. May be. Further, the second state may be a state in which the game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state, or may be a state in which the game ball is more difficult to win in the attacker than the first state. It may be.

  Further, the control means may be capable of controlling only in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or in the gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It may be one. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Good.

  Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state in which only the attacker is likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state, or is likely to be in the second state other than the attacker than in the first gaming state. It may be in a gaming state. Further, the second game state may be a game state in which the attacker is always more likely to be in the second state than the first game state, and the attacker is not likely to be in the second state than in the first game state. There may be a game state in some cases.

  Also, in the second gaming state, if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. There may be a case where the number of award balls obtained is added to the total number of award balls displayed and displayed, and in the second game state, the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are in the attacker. In the case of winning, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the display other than the total number of won prize balls display after the second state ends, Good. Also, in the second game state, if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. When the number of award balls is always added to the total number of award balls displayed, it may be displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker. In some cases, after the second state is finished, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winning game balls to the attacker may not be displayed by being added to the total acquired prize ball number display.

  Also, in the second gaming state, if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. There may be a case where only the number of award balls that have been obtained is added to the total number of award balls displayed and displayed, and in the second game state, the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are in the attacker. When a prize is won, the number of award balls other than the number of award balls of the game ball to the attacker may be displayed after being added to the total won award ball display after the second state is finished. Good.

  Also, in the second game state, if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, only the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. There may be a case where the corresponding number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed. In the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In case of winning, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes other than the number of prizes of game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of awarded prize balls display after the second state is finished, Good.

  In addition, in the second game state, if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker only after the second state ends. There may be a case where the corresponding number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed. In the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In the case where a prize is won, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of game balls won in the attacker may be displayed in addition to the total number of acquired prize balls even when the second state is not finished. Good.

  Also, in the second game state, only when the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. There may be a case where the corresponding number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed. In the second game state, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. Even in cases other than when the prize is won, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is finished, Good.

  Also, only in the second game state, if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends. There may be a case where the corresponding number of prize balls is added to the total number of won prize balls to be displayed, and even in a game state other than the second game state, the attacker is in the second state and is 1 or more. When a game ball wins the attacker, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of game balls won in the attacker may be displayed after being added to the total number of won prize balls after the second state is finished. Good.

  Also, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, the second state even if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker. After the end, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends After that, only the addition of the number of award balls that has not yet been added according to the number of awarding game balls to the attacker may be added to the total award ball number display, or in the second game state, If the condition is met, even if one or more game balls have won the attacker in the second state, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won't be added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and the attacker will be in the second state. The second after the state has been completed, may be also carried out other than the addition of the non-added worth of prize balls of the total number of won awards ball numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker. Also, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, the second state even if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker. After the end, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker may be added to the total number of award winning balls display, or in the second gaming state, If the condition is met, even if one or more game balls have won the attacker in the second state, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won't be added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and the attacker will be in the second state. After the second state has been completed, there may be a case where the addition of the non-addition amount of prize balls of the total number of acquired prize balls numeral corresponding to the winning number of game balls into the attacker is not performed.

  Also, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, the second state even if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker. After the end, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of unadded prize balls corresponding to the number of winning game balls to the attacker may be added only to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second gaming state, If the condition is met, even if one or more game balls have won the attacker in the second state, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won't be added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and the attacker will be in the second state. The second after the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the non-added worth of prize balls number of display other than the total acquisition Prize counts display corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Also, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, the second state even if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker. After the end, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends After that, the total number of award balls that has not been added may be added to the total number of award balls displayed according to the number of awards of the game balls to the attacker, or in the second gaming state, If the condition is met, even if one or more game balls have won the attacker in the second state, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won't be added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and the attacker will be in the second state. The second state after is completed, may be performed is added to the non-added content of the award total winning prize sphere other than the number of winning balls of the number of balls numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Also, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, the second state even if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker. After the end, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of award balls that has not yet been added may be added to the total number of award balls to be displayed according to the number of awarding game balls to only the attacker, or in the second game state, If the condition is met, even if one or more game balls have won the attacker in the second state, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won't be added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and the attacker will be in the second state. The second after the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the total acquisition Award sphere notation of non-added worth of prize balls speed corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the other attacker.

  Also, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, the second state even if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker. After the end, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends Only after that, the number of unadded prize balls corresponding to the number of winning game balls to the attacker may be added to the total number of won prize balls display, or in the second gaming state, If the condition is met, even if one or more game balls have won the attacker in the second state, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the number of prizes won't be added to the total number of prize balls displayed, and the attacker will be in the second state. Other than after the second of the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the non-added worth of prize balls of the total number of won awards ball numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Also, in the second game state, only when a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, the second state After the end, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of award balls that has not yet been added may be added to the total number of award ball gains display according to the number of awarding game balls to the attacker, or a certain condition in the second gaming state. If the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker even when the condition is not satisfied, the game to the attacker after the second state is finished. The number of prize balls according to the number of balls won is not added to the total number of won prize balls display. And it is after the second of the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the total acquisition Award sphere notation of non-added worth of prize balls speed corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Further, only in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, After the state is finished, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of acquired prize balls display, then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state becomes After the end, the number of unadded prize balls corresponding to the number of winning game balls to the attacker may be added to the total number of won prize balls display, or a game state other than the second game state. Even in the case where a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won is not added to the total number of won prize balls display, and the attacker next After the second state is completed after the second state is completed, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of awarding game balls to the attacker may be added to the total number of award winning balls display. .

Also, "The result of the game is the result of the symbol variation display,
The certain condition is, when the attacker makes a state transition from the first state to the second state, as a result of the symbol variation display that is suspended in execution, the attacker is placed in the second state. A condition that includes a result that changes state,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "if the certain condition is satisfied, the result of the pattern change display of which execution is suspended includes the result that the attacker is changed to the second state. A display indicating at least that (hereinafter, "reservation consecutive suggestion display [e.g.," W-UP chance! "Shown in FIG. 37 (g)) or" large bonus super intense heat shown in FIG. 38 (g) ". “Display etc.]” is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, if a certain condition is satisfied, the pending consecutive chan suggestion display (the result of the pattern variation display in which execution is suspended includes the result that the attacker changes to the second state). Display indicating at least that it is displayed) may be displayed, or when a certain condition is satisfied, a display other than the pending consecutive chan suggestion display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain condition is satisfied, the pending consecutive chan suggestion display may be displayed without fail, and when a certain condition is satisfied, the pending consecutive chan suggestion display may not be displayed. It may be.

  In addition, the pending consecutive chan suggestion display may be displayed only when a certain condition is satisfied, or the pending consecutive chan suggestion display is displayed even when the certain condition is not satisfied. May be.

In addition, "The pending consecutive chan suggestion display is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker ends the second state and starts symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 37 (g)- As shown in FIG. 38 (h) and FIG. 38 (g) to FIG. 38 (h), the display of "W-UP chance!" And the display of "Large bonus super intense heat!" It continues to be displayed even after it is finished and the pattern variation display is started],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, by starting the symbol variable display while the pending consecutive chan suggestion display is being displayed, it may be possible to make the next hit appear immediately.

  Here, the pending consecutive chan suggestion display may be continuously displayed only after the attacker finishes the second state and starts the symbol variation display, or the attacker may display the second state. It may be continuously displayed other than after the symbol variation display is started after the end. Further, the pending consecutive chan suggestion display may be always displayed even after the attacker has finished the second state and the symbol variable display is started, or the attacker is in the second state. It may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display is started after the end.

Also, "the second state is both a big hit game state and a small hit game state,
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern variable display,
There is a case where the result of the decorative symbol variation display that is to be shifted to the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol variation display that is to be shifted to the small hit game state are the same [for example, shown in FIG. 6 (c). As described above, a combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" may be displayed when it is a big hit, or when it is a small hit. May also be displayed in], etc.,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only the result of the decorative symbol variation display that results in the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol variation display that results in the small hit game state are the same, or the big hit game state. There may be the same result as the result of the decorative symbol variable display that is to be transferred to, and the result other than the result of the decorative symbol variable display that is to be transferred to the small hit game state. In addition, the result of the decorative symbol variation display that will result in the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol variation display that will result in the small hit game state may always be the same, or the big hit game state There may be a case where the result of the decorative pattern variation display to be performed is not the same as the result of the decorative pattern variation display to be shifted to the small hitting game state.

In addition, “a decoration member is arranged on the front side of the attacker, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the operation mode of the attacker [for example, as shown in FIG. 3 (a) and FIG. The mouth 235a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, and is difficult for the player to see, etc.],
The operation mode of the attacker is different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make it difficult for the type of hit to occur in the open mode of the attacker.

  Here, the decoration member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker so that only the operation mode of the attacker is difficult for the player to visually recognize, or the decoration member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker except for the operation mode of the attacker. The operation mode may also be difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, a decoration member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker so that the player cannot easily see the operation mode of the attacker, or the decoration member is arranged on the front side of the attacker so that the operation mode of the attacker is the player. In some cases, it may not be difficult to see.

  Further, only the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the operation mode of the attacker, or a member other than the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to operate the attacker. May be difficult to see by the player. Further, the decoration member may be arranged only on the front surface side of the attacker to make it difficult for the player to see the operation mode of the attacker, or the decoration member may be arranged on the other side than the front surface side of the attacker to improve the operation mode of the attacker. It may be difficult for the player to see it.

  Further, in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, only the operation mode of the attacker may be different, and in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the modes other than the operation mode of the attacker may be different. In addition, the operation mode of the attacker may be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and the operation mode of the attacker may not be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

  Also, the operation mode of the attacker may be different only in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, or the operation mode of the attacker may be different even in the game states other than the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

Further, in the "second game state, the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (h), a display mode in which a decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen, etc.] May display variable display,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which a decorative pattern is largely displayed in the central portion of the display screen as shown in FIG. 37 (a)] May be displayed,
The size of the decorative design in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative design in the second display mode,
In the second gaming state, a period during execution of the symbol variation display that is suspended when the second state ends (hereinafter, "a certain period [for example, when the small hit game is suspended is suspended. The period until the four symbol variation displays are exhausted] ”)), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but when the certain condition is satisfied. In, even during the certain period, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), the small hit game is held at the end. Among the symbol variation displays that are displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed large in the central portion of the display screen during the symbol variation display that is a win (small hit / big hit), etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this amusement machine, for example, when it is possible to make it look like a continuous succession by displaying a big success pattern suddenly when the big hit is suddenly displayed while keeping the outlying part in case of continuous succession There is.

  Here, in the second game state, there may be a case where the decorative symbol variable display is displayed only in the first display mode, and in the second game state, decoration is also performed in display modes other than the first display mode. There may be a case where a variable display of symbols is displayed. Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display may be always displayed in the first display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed in the first display mode. It may be.

  Further, only in the second gaming state, there may be a case where the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode, and even in gaming states other than the second gaming mode, the decorative symbol in the first display mode. A variable display may be displayed in some cases.

  In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed only in the second display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. A variable display may be displayed in some cases. Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display may be always displayed in the second display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed in the second display mode. It may be.

  Further, only in the second game state, there may be a case where the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the second display mode, and even in a game state other than the second game state, the decorative symbol in the second display mode. A variable display may be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the size of the decorative design in the first display mode may be smaller than only the size of the decorative design in the second display mode, and the size of the decorative design in the first display mode is the second display. It may be smaller than the size other than the size of the decorative pattern in the aspect. Further, the size of the decorative design in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative design in the second display mode, and the size of the decorative design in the first display mode is the second display mode. The size may not be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in.

  Further, only the size of the decorative design in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative design in the second display mode, and the sizes other than the decorative design in the first display mode are also in the second display mode. It may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern.

  Also, in the second gaming state, during a certain period (the period during which the symbol variation display is being held when the second state ends), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode. However, if a certain condition is established, even in a certain period, only the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, In the period, the decorative pattern variable display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even in a certain period, the decorative pattern variable display other than the decorative pattern variable display is displayed in the second display mode. The display may also be displayed. In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, The decorative design variable display may be always displayed in the second display mode, and in the second game state, the decorative design variable display is displayed in the first display mode in a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. When it is, the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, The decorative symbol variable display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or in the second game state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode in a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. When it is, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode for a certain period.

  Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but only when a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, The decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode, or the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the first display mode for a certain period in the second game state, but a certain condition is satisfied. Also in cases other than the case, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but if only a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, The decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode in a certain period, but other than a certain condition. Even when the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Further, in the second gaming state, only the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, The decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode, and in the second gaming state, a display other than the decorative symbol variable display is also displayed in the first display mode in a certain period, When the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed only in the first display mode for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, The decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode for a certain period, or If the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode even for a certain period.

  In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode only for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, The decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode even during a period other than a certain period, When the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Further, only in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even for a certain period, The decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode, and even in a game state other than the second game state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the first display mode in a certain period, When a certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

In addition, "even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, the number of winning game balls in the attacker after the second state is finished. In the case where the number of prize balls according to the above is not added to the total number of acquired prize balls display, the attacker is next in the second state after the second state is finished. In the period after the end of the state, until the total number of award balls is added to the total number of award balls, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of awards of game balls to the attacker is added. Change the display mode of the number of balls display to another display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (h) to FIG. 37 (o), the prize won in the first small hitting game in order to carry out the continuous holding. While the addition of the number of balls to the display of the total number of awarded balls is reserved, the color of the display of the total number of awarded balls is highlighted. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, the prize balls according to the number of winning game balls in the attacker after the second state is finished. If the number is not added to the total award ball count display, after the second state ends, the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends before the attacker. In the period until the total number of award balls that has not been added is added to the total award ball count display according to the number of winning game balls, only the display mode of the total award ball count display is changed to another display mode. It may be changed or even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends. If the number of prize balls is not added to the total number of acquired prize balls display, after the second state ends After the attacker enters the second state and the second state is completed, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of awarding game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of award winning balls display. The display mode of the display of the total number of winning prize balls may be changed to a display mode other than another display mode during the period until the notice. Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls in the attacker after the second state is finished. In the case where the addition to the total number of awards balls is not performed, the attacker enters the second state after the second state ends, and then the second state ends. In the period until the total number of award balls that has not been added according to the number of winning game balls is added to the total award ball count display, the display mode of the total award ball count display must be changed to another display mode. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. If the number of prize balls that have been After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won in the attacker is added to the total number of award winning balls display. In the period up to, there may be a case where the display mode of the total number of won prize balls display is not changed to another display mode.

  Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls in the attacker after the second state is finished. In the case where the addition to the total number of awards balls is not performed, the attacker enters the second state after the second state ends, and then the second state ends. During the period until the addition of the number of award balls that has not been added according to the number of winning game balls to the total award ball count display, only the display mode of the total award ball count display is changed to another display mode. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. If the number of prize balls that have been After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won in the attacker is added to the total number of award winning balls display. In the period up to, the display mode of the display other than the total number of winning prize balls display may be changed to another display mode.

  Also, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state has ended. In the case where the addition to the total number of awards balls is not performed, the attacker enters the second state after the second state ends, and then the second state ends. The display mode of the total acquired award ball number display is changed to another display mode only during the period until the addition of the number of award balls that has not yet been added according to the number of won game balls to the total acquired award ball number display Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. If the number of prize balls that have been After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won in the attacker is added to the total number of award winning balls display. In a period other than the period up to, the display mode of the total number of won prize balls display may be changed to another display mode.

  Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls in the attacker after the second state is finished. If no addition is made to the display of the total number of award balls, the attacker enters the attacker only after the second state ends and then the second state ends. In the period until the total number of award balls is added to the total number of award balls that has not been added in accordance with the number of winning game balls, the display mode of the total award ball number display is changed to another display mode. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. If the number of prize balls that have been Even after the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, addition of the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of award winning balls display. The display mode of the total number of won prize balls may be changed to another display mode during the period until the notification.

  Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls in the attacker after the second state is finished. Only when the addition to the total number of awarded balls is not performed, the attacker enters the second state after the second state ends, and then the second state ends before the attacker. In the period until the total number of award balls is added to the total number of award balls that has not been added in accordance with the number of winning game balls, the display mode of the total award ball number display is changed to another display mode. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. The second state is terminated even when the total number of the award balls obtained is not added to the total award ball count display. Then, after the attacker enters the second state and the second state is completed, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of awarding game balls to the attacker is added to the total award ball number display. The display mode of the total prize ball count display may be changed to another display mode during the period until.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[First symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display [for example, first special symbol display device 212 or the like],
Second symbol display means [eg, second special symbol display device 214 or the like] capable of executing the second symbol variable display,
An attacker in which a game ball can be won [eg, a first variable winning port 234a, a second variable winning port 235a],
Fluctuation time determination means for determining the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display [for example, the CPU 304 or the like of the main control unit 300],
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A first control unit [eg, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] capable of controlling at least the first symbol display unit and the second symbol display unit,
Second control means capable of controlling at least the display means [for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with,
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time [for example, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212]. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be simultaneously performed, etc.],
As a result of the second symbol variation display, a small hit symbol [for example, "special map f", "special map g", etc.) can be displayed and then transition to a small hit game state [for example, second special map. A small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes is executed when "special drawing f" or "special drawing g" is stopped and displayed on the display device 214 and a small hit occurs, etc.],
In the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol variation display until the variation time determined by the variation time determining means elapses, in the case of the small hit game state (hereinafter, "a certain case [eg, As shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second special figure display device 214 is a "special figure g" with a small hit between the start of the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 and the stop display. Then, the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed to enter the small hitting game state, etc.] ").
In a case where the measurement of the variation time of the first symbol variation display is interrupted in the period from the start of the display of the small hit symbol to the end of the small hit game state in the certain case (hereinafter, "or 14). [For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), a small hit occurs in special figure 2, a period until the small hit game related to the small hit is finished, the symbol in special figure 1 The progress of the variable display is interrupted (interruption), etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is a first notice display [for example, a display of a pre-read notice notice effect for the period shown in FIG. 34 (j) or FIG. 35 (j ′)],
The first notice display may be displayed in association with the certain state [for example, the display of the preliminary read-ahead notice effect may be displayed in association with the interruption state, etc. ],
The second control means is a means for performing control according to a command from the first control means,
A certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started [for example, a special symbol variation start command including stop symbol information and It is determined whether or not the first notice display is displayed in relation to the special figure stop type command, etc. [for example, in the case of a small hit in "special figure g", it is shown in FIG. 34 (j). In the case of a small hit in the case of "special figure f", the display of the preliminary read-ahead notice effect is displayed, etc.].
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
I explained.

  According to the conventional game table, the display means has room for improvement, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol display means may always execute the first symbol variable display, or may not execute the first symbol variable display.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. . Further, the second symbol display means may always execute the second symbol variable display, or may not execute the second symbol variable display.

  Further, the variation time determining means may determine only the variation time of the first symbol variation display, or may also determine the variation time of the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Good. Further, the variation time determination means may be one that always determines the variation time of the first symbol variation display, or may not determine the variation time of the first symbol variation display. .

  The variation time determining means may also determine the variation time of the second symbol variation display, or may also determine the variation time of the normal symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may display a plurality of displays in some cases.

  Further, the first control means may be capable of controlling only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. The means may also be controllable. Further, the first control means may necessarily control the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, and does not control the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. There may be cases.

  The second control means may be capable of controlling only the display means, or may be capable of controlling means other than the display means. Further, the second control means may necessarily control the display means, or may not control the display means.

  Further, there may be a case where only both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are being executed at the same time, and symbols other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display The variable display may be executed at the same time. In addition, there may be a case where both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are always executed at the same time, and both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are simultaneously performed. It may not be done.

  In addition, after the small hitting pattern is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, it may be possible to shift only to the small hitting game state, or the small winning symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display. It may be possible to shift to a gaming state other than the small hitting gaming state later. Also, as a result of the second symbol variation display, the small hit symbol may be displayed and then the small hit game state may be entered without fail, or as a result of the second symbol variation display, the small hit symbol is displayed and then the small symbol. There may be a case where the winning game state is not entered.

  In addition, it may be possible to shift to the small hitting game state only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variable display, and the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variable display. It may be possible to shift to the small hitting game state other than afterwards.

  Further, there may be only a certain case (when the small hitting game state is entered in the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol variable display until the variation time determined by the variation time determining means elapses). However, there may be cases other than certain cases. In addition, there may be a certain case, and there may be no case.

  Further, in a certain state (in the case where the display of the small hit symbol is started in the certain case until the end of the small hit game state is finished, the measurement of the variation time of the first symbol variation display is interrupted. (State) only, or may be in a state other than a certain state. Further, it may be in a certain state or may not be in a certain state.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display or may not display the first notice display.

  Further, only the first notice display may be displayed in association with a certain state, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed in association with a certain state. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in association with a certain state, or the first notice display may not be displayed in some cases in relation to a certain state.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in association with a certain state, or the first notice display may be displayed in association with a state other than the certain state. May be.

  Further, the second control means may perform only control according to the command from the first control means, or may perform control other than control according to the command from the first control means. May be Further, the second control means may necessarily perform control according to the command from the first control means, or may not perform control according to the command from the first control means. It may be one.

  Whether or not the first notice display is displayed in association with a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variable display is started. May be determined, or other than the first notice display related to a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. It may be determined whether or not the display of is also displayed. Whether or not the first notice display is displayed in association with a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variable display is started. May be always determined, or the first notice display relating to a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. In some cases, it may not be determined whether or not is displayed.

In addition, “a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display [for example,“ Special symbol C ”indicating a deviation” or the like] is started for a certain time [for example, t21 in FIG. 13 (b)] The symbol is continuously displayed in a period until the symbol display time of the special figure 1 which is a period from t22 to elapse,
The certain period of time after the display of the certain symbol [for example, "Special symbol C" or the like indicating a deviation] representing the result of the first symbol variation display is started [for example, t21 to t21 in FIG. 13 (b)] Even when the small hit game state is reached in the period until the symbol display time of the special figure 1 which is the period of t22] elapses, the measurement of the certain time is not interrupted,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this amusement machine, for example, if the time out of time is extended, disappointment is emphasized, and the time until the start of the next symbol variation display becomes long, so it may not be possible to switch feelings. However, there are cases where such a problem can be solved.

  Further, according to this gaming table, since the symbol variation display can be started immediately after the end of the small hit game, it may be possible to entertain by shortening a certain time while the symbols are not varying.

  Further, according to this gaming table, when a small hit occurs during the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is lengthened (that is, the ratio of the total during variation and stop display). In some cases, it can be entertaining to the player (since the ratio of fluctuations is large).

  Here, only a certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from when the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variable display is started until a certain time elapses. The symbols other than the certain symbol may be continuously displayed in the period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variable display until a certain time passes. In addition, a certain symbol may always be continuously displayed in a period from when the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variable display is started until a certain time elapses. There may be a case where a certain symbol is not continuously displayed in a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variable display until a certain time elapses.

  In addition, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed only during a period from when the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variable display is started until a certain time elapses. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variable display until a certain time elapses.

  Further, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from the start of displaying only a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variable display until a certain period of time elapses. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of symbols other than the certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display until a certain time elapses.

  In addition, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing only the result of the first symbol variable display until a certain period of time elapses. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period from when the display of a certain symbol representing a result other than the result of the symbol variation display is started until a certain time elapses.

  Also, even when the small hit game state in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, only a certain period of time is measured Does not have to be interrupted, and even in the case where the small hitting game state is entered in a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol showing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. The measurement of time other than a certain time may not be interrupted. In addition, even if the small hit game state in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses, the measurement of a certain time It does not have to be interrupted by any means, and even in the case where the small hit game state is reached in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. The measurement of a certain time may be interrupted.

  Moreover, only when the small hitting gaming state is entered in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain period of time elapses, measurement of a certain period of time is interrupted. It does not have to be, even in the case other than the case where the small hitting gaming state is entered in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. The measurement of a certain time may not be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state occurs only during the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol showing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain period of time elapses, measurement of a certain period of time May not be interrupted, in the case where the small hit game state in the period other than the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol showing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. Even if there is, the measurement for a certain time may not be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state occurs in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain period of time elapses, measurement of a certain period of time May not be interrupted, in the case where the small hit game state in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol showing the result of the first symbol variation display until the time other than a certain time elapses Even if there is, the measurement for a certain time may not be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state occurs in the period from the start of displaying only a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain period of time elapses, measurement of a certain period of time May not be interrupted, in the case where the small hit game state in the period from the start of the display of symbols other than a certain symbol showing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time passes Even if there is, the measurement for a certain time may not be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state occurs in the period from the start of displaying a certain symbol showing only the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain period of time elapses, a certain period of time is measured. May not be interrupted, in the case of a small hit game state in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol showing the result other than the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses Even if there is, the measurement for a certain time may not be interrupted.

In addition, "the second control means, the first symbol variation display and the second symbol by the certain command [for example, special figure stop type command etc.] received during execution of the second symbol variation display. Is a means for specifying which one of the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed first,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of specifying only whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by a certain command, or the second control means by a certain command. It may be identifiable in addition to whether or not the result of the symbol variable display is a small hit. Further, the second control means may be one that always specifies whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by a certain command, or the second symbol variation by a certain command. There may be a case where it is not specified whether or not the display result is a small hit.

Further, “the second control means displays the small hit symbol as a result of the second symbol variation display by the certain command [eg, special symbol variation start command including stop symbol information]. It is a means that can determine whether or not,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of only specifying whether or not the small hitting symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display by a certain command, or by a certain command. It may be identifiable in addition to whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variable display. Further, the second control means may be one that always specifies whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display by a certain command, or by a certain command the second There may be a case where it is not specified whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the symbol variable display.

In addition, “a plurality of types of the small hit symbols [for example,“ special figure g ”in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes 12 times,“ special figure f ”in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes once, etc.] are displayed. Is possible,
It is possible to shift to the small hitting game state according to the kind of the small hitting symbol [for example, when the small hit is made in the "special drawing g", the small hitting game in which the second variable winning port 235a is opened and closed 12 times When the state shifts to a small hit in the "special figure f", the second variable winning port 235a opens and closes once, and then shifts to a small hitting game state, etc.],
The display mode of the first notice display is determined according to the type of the small hitting game state that has been transferred [for example, in the case of a small hit in the "special figure g", the pre-reading for the duration shown in FIG. When a notice display is displayed and a small hit occurs in "special figure f", a display of a pre-reading notice effect is displayed for the period shown in FIG. 35 (j ')],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be displayed, or a symbol other than a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of small hitting symbols may be displayed without fail, or a plurality of types of small hitting symbols may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be possible to shift only to the small hitting game state corresponding to the type of the small hitting symbol, or it may be possible to shift to a gaming state other than the small hitting game state corresponding to the type of the small hitting symbol. . In addition, the small hitting game state depending on the type of the small hitting symbol may be necessarily transferred, or the small hitting gaming state according to the type of the small hitting symbol may not be shifted.

  Further, it may be possible to shift to a small hitting game state according to only the type of small hitting symbol, or it may be possible to shift to a small hitting game state according to other than the type of small hitting symbol.

  Further, only the display mode of the first notice display may be determined according to the type of the transferred small hitting game state, or other than the display form of the first notice display depending on the type of the transferred small hitting game state. The display mode of may be determined. Further, the display mode of the first notice display may be determined in accordance with the type of the small hitting game state that has been transferred, or the display form of the first notice display depending on the type of the small hitting game state that has been transferred. It may not be decided.

  Further, the display mode of the first notice display may be determined only according to the type of the small hitting game state that has been transferred, or the first notice display according to other than the type of the small hitting game state that has been changed. The display mode of may be determined.

In addition, "the first notice display is a pre-read notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display which is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started in the above-mentioned certain case. [For example, the display of the pre-reading advance notice effect for the period shown in FIG. 34 (j) is intended for the symbol variation display related to the first holding of special figure 1],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notice display is, in some cases, only the display of the look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. There may be, and in some cases, there is also a display other than the pre-reading notice display related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is suspended when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. Good. Further, in some cases, the first notice display is a display of a pre-read notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. Or, in some cases, it may be a display other than the pre-reading notice display related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. It may be.

  In addition, the first notice display is a display of a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display, which is held at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started, only in some cases. May also be, in a case other than a certain case, is the display of the pre-reading notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is held when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. Good.

In addition, “one of the plurality of displays is a production display [for example, a production display relating to the variable display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 33 (f) to (n)],
The display of the effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), in the normal gaming state, symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212. Variable display of decorative design is displayed according to the display],
Even in the case of the certain state, the effect display proceeds without interruption [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (i) to FIG. Even after the end of the small hit game related to the small hit, the effect display related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is proceeding without interruption, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the display of the effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, and the display other than the display of the effect display may be performed in response to the start of the first symbol variation display. It may be started. Further, the display of the effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variable display, or the display of the effect display may not be started in response to the start of the first symbol variable display. It may be.

  Further, the display of the effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variable display, or the display of the effect display may be performed in addition to the fact that the first symbol variable display is started. It may be started.

  Further, even in a certain state, only the effect display may proceed without interruption, and even in the certain state, displays other than the effect display may proceed without interruption. Further, even when a certain state is reached, the effect display may proceed without interruption, and even when a certain state is achieved, the effect display may not proceed without interruption.

  Also, the effect display may proceed without interruption only in a certain state, or the effect display may proceed without interruption even in a case other than the case of a certain state. Further, the effect display may proceed without interruption even in the case of only a certain state, or the effect display may proceed without interruption in the case of a state other than the certain state.

In addition, "the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern variation display in the case of the certain state to the display start of the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display with a fluctuation and the case of not having the certain state The time from the start of the certain decorative pattern variable display to the start of displaying the result of the certain decorative pattern variable display by the fluctuation is the same [for example, as shown in FIG. The time from the start of the decorative symbol variation display according to FIG. 1 to the start of the swing variation is the same whether or not a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, etc.],
When the certain decorative symbol variable display in the case of the certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variable display with the fluctuation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol fluctuation display of Toku-zu 1 is displayed with the fluctuation of fluctuation. The display of the pre-reading notice production may be displayed for the time shown in FIG. 34 (j) as the display of the pre-production while being displayed after the display].
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern variable display in the case of a certain state until the display start of the result of the certain decorative pattern variable display by a swing variation, and the case of not being in a certain state Only the time from the start of display of the decorative pattern change to the start of displaying the result of the certain decorative pattern change display with the fluctuation may be the same, or a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state From the start of the time until the display of the result of a certain decorative pattern variation display is started with the fluctuation, and when a certain decorative pattern variation display does not occur in a certain state, a certain decorative pattern variation display of The time other than the time until the display of the result is changed by shaking may be the same. Also, the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern variable display in the case of a certain state to the start of the display of the result of the certain decorative pattern variable display by a swing fluctuation, and a certain decoration in the case of no certain state The time from the start of the pattern change display to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative pattern change display with the fluctuation may be the same, or a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state The time from the start until the display of a certain decorative pattern variation display is started with the fluctuation, and the result of a certain decorative pattern variation display after the certain decorative pattern variation display is started in a certain state There may be a case where the time until the display is started is not the same due to the fluctuation of.

  Also, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in the case of a certain state is started, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a swing variation, the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In, in the case where only the first notice display may be displayed, when a certain decorative symbol variable display in a certain state is started, the result of the certain decorative symbol variable display is shaken and fluctuated. After the display in, the display other than the first notice display may be displayed in the period until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. Also, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in the case of a certain state is started, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a swing variation, the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In, in the case where the first notice display may be displayed without fail, or when a certain decorative pattern variable display in a certain state is started, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variable display with shaking fluctuation The first notice display may not be displayed during the period until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed.

  Also, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in the case of a certain state is started, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a swing variation, the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. Only in the case, the first notice display may be displayed, and when a certain decorative symbol variable display in a certain state is started, the result of the certain decorative symbol variable display is shaken and fluctuated. The first notice display may be displayed during a period other than the period until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed after the display.

  Also, when a certain decorative symbol variable display in the case of a certain state is started, only after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variable display as a fluctuation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. In the period, the first notice display may be displayed, and when a certain decorative symbol variable display in a certain state is started, the result of the certain decorative symbol variable display is shaken and fluctuated. Other than after the display in, the first notice display may be displayed during the period until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed.

  Further, only when a certain decorative symbol variable display in the case of a certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variable display by the fluctuation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. In the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or in a case other than the case where a certain decorative pattern variable display in a certain state is started, a certain decorative pattern variable display The first notice display may be displayed during the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed after the result is displayed as a fluctuation.

  Also, when a certain decorative symbol variable display in the case of only a certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variable display with the fluctuation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. In the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative symbol variable display in a state other than a certain state is started, the result of a certain decorative symbol variable display The first notice display may be displayed in the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed after displaying the fluctuation display.

In addition, in the case where the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of being in a certain state is the result of deviation, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, the first symbol variation display is In the period until the stop display, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the variation of the decorative symbol according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is out of order. In the display, the display of the pre-reading notice production may be displayed during the period shown in FIG. 34 (j) as the display of the stage production displayed after the fluctuation display],
When the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of being in a certain state is a big hit result, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a swing variation, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period up to, the first notice display may not be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible for an advanced player to understand that the first notice display is displayed so that the symbol fluctuation display does not cause a revival big hit.

  Further, according to this gaming machine, when the first notice display is displayed during the execution of the continuous notice performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is not the symbol variation display. Since it can be seen that there is not, it may be possible to concentrate after the next symbol variation display.

  Here, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of being in a certain state is the result of deviation, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a fluctuation, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period up to, there may be a case where only the first notice display is displayed, and when the result of the decorative pattern variable display in a certain state becomes a result, the decorative symbol variable display After displaying the result of (1) in swing fluctuation, a display other than the first notice display may be displayed in the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of a certain state is the result of the deviation, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variable display with the fluctuation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed without fail, and when the result of the decorative pattern variation display in a certain state is a disappointing result, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is shaken and fluctuated. In some cases, the first notice display may not be displayed in the period until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed after being displayed in.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of a certain state is the result of the deviation, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variable display with the fluctuation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. The first notice display may be displayed only during the period of, and when the result of the decorative design variable display in a certain state becomes a result, the decorative design variable display of After the result is displayed as a fluctuation, the first notice display may be displayed during a period other than the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped.

  Further, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of deviation, the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed only after the result of the decorative symbol variable display is displayed as a fluctuation. In the period up to, there may be cases where the first notice display is displayed, and when the result of the decorative design variable display in a certain state becomes a result, the decorative design variable display The first notice display may be displayed during the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed, other than after the result is displayed as the fluctuation.

  In addition, only when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state becomes a result of deviation, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variable display with the fluctuation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed, and the decorative pattern variation is also displayed in other cases than the case where the result of the decorative pattern variation display in a certain state is a disappointing result. The first notice display may be displayed in the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed after the display result is displayed as the fluctuation.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state becomes a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variable display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, only the first notice display may not be displayed, and when the result of the decorative pattern variable display in a certain state is a big hit result, the decorative symbol variable display of After the result is displayed as the fluctuation, the display other than the first notice display may not be displayed in the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state becomes a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variable display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may not necessarily be displayed, and when the result of the decorative pattern variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, the result of the decorative pattern variation display is shaken. In some cases, the first notice display may be displayed during the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed after the variation display.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state becomes a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variable display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. Only in the period of, the first notice display may not be displayed, and when the result of the decorative pattern variation display in a certain state becomes a big hit result, the decorative symbol variation display of After the result is displayed as a fluctuation, the first notice display may not be displayed in a period other than the period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed.

  Also, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed only after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a fluctuation. In the period until, the first notice display may not be displayed, and if the result of the decorative pattern variable display in a certain state is a big hit result, the decorative symbol variable display In addition to the case where the result of (1) is displayed as a fluctuation, the first notice display may not be displayed in the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, only when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display as a fluctuation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped. In the period of, the first notice display may not be displayed, and the decorative symbol variation is also displayed when the result of the decorative symbol variable display in a certain state is other than the big hit result. After the display result is displayed by the fluctuation, the first notice display may not be displayed in the period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "when the first notice display is displayed, the display is always started after the display of the first notice display reaches the certain state [for example, as shown in FIG. , When the display of the preliminary read-ahead notice production is displayed as the display of the preliminary production, the preliminary read-ahead notice production is started after the interruption period is started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first notice display is displayed, it may be started only after the first notice display is in a certain state, or when the first notice display is displayed. May be started even after the first notice display is always in a certain state. When the first notice display is displayed, it may be started after the first notice display is in a certain state, or when the first notice display is displayed. There may be a case where the display of the first notice display does not always start after a certain state is displayed.

  When the first notice display is displayed, it may be started after only the first notice display is in a certain state, or when the first notice display is displayed. The display other than the first notice display may be started after a certain state is surely reached.

  Further, only when the first notice display is displayed, it may be started after the display of the first notice display is always in a certain state, and except when the first notice display is displayed. Also in this case, the display may be started after the first notice display is always in a certain state.

  Further, when only the first notice display is displayed, it may be started after the display of the first notice display is always in a certain state, and a display other than the first notice display is also displayed. In the case of the above, it may be started after the first notice display is always in a certain state.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of displays is a second notice display [for example, a display display in a prefetch mode, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display different from the first notice display,
A game table characterized by this. 』
Was also explained.

  The second notice display may be a different notice display from the first notice display, or may be a different notice display from the first notice display.

In addition, "The second notice display is a look-ahead notice display,
The second notice display is a display that is displayed over a plurality of the first symbol variation displays [for example, the effect display in the look-ahead mode is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays of Toku-zu 1] Etc.],
The first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display,
A gaming table characterized by that.

  Here, the second notice display may be only the look-ahead notice display, or may be a display other than the look-ahead notice display, and the second notice display may be a look-ahead notice display. The pre-reading notice display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only over a plurality of first symbol variation displays, or across a plurality of symbol variation displays other than the first symbol variation display. It may be displayed as. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed over a plurality of first symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of first symbol variation displays. It may be one.

  Further, it is possible that only the first notice display is displayed during the display of the second notice display, or that a display other than the first notice display is also displayed during the display of the second notice display. You may have. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed during the display of the second notice display, or even if the first notice display is not displayed during the display of the second notice display. Good.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only while the second notice display is being displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed also while a display other than the second notice display is being displayed. You may have been.

Further, "If the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in the certain state, the first notice display is not displayed in the first symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, only the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, or a certain state When the start condition of the first symbol variable display is satisfied in, the display other than the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variable display. Also, if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not necessarily be displayed in the first symbol variation display, and in a certain state When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, and in a certain state Even in the case other than the case where the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Further, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied only in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, and other than the certain state Even in the state, if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Further, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed only in the first symbol variation display, and in a certain state When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may not be displayed in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

Also, "It is possible to control one of the multiple game states,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), etc.],
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state [eg, a probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
At least a small hit symbol will be displayed than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first gaming state [for example, 5 seconds]. The length of the variation time of the second symbol variation display [for example, 580 seconds] is longer,
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, it may be possible to control only one of the plurality of gaming states, or it is possible to control to a gaming state other than one of the plurality of gaming states. May be. Further, it may be one that is always controlled to one of the plurality of gaming states, or may not be controlled to one of the plurality of gaming states.

  Further, the control means may be capable of controlling only in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or in the gaming states other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It may be one. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Good.

  Further, the second gaming state may be more advantageous than only the first gaming state, or may be more advantageous than gaming states other than the first gaming state. In addition, the second gaming state may be always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means in the first gaming state, at least the variation time of the second symbol variation display, in which the small hit symbol is displayed Only the length may be longer, or at least a small hit symbol will be displayed than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first gaming state. The length other than the length of the variation time of the second symbol variation display may be longer. Further, than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means in the first gaming state, at least the variation time of the second symbol variation display, in which the small hit symbol is displayed The length may be always longer, and at least a small hit symbol will be displayed than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first gaming state. The length of the variation time of the second symbol variation display may not be longer.

  Also, rather than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determining means in the first gaming state, only the small hit symbol will be displayed, and the variation time of the second symbol variation display The length may be longer, and the symbols other than the small hit symbol are displayed, rather than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first gaming state. The variation time length of the second symbol variation display may be longer.

In addition, in the small hitting game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right side than to hit the left side. [For example, as shown in FIG. Is easier to win in the second variable winning port 235a],
In the first gaming state, if the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit gaming state, it is after the small hit gaming state ends. During the period [for example, 30 seconds, etc.], the display for prompting the player to left is not displayed [for example, as shown in 20 (a), 30 seconds after the small hitting game is finished in the normal gaming state. Even if you make a right-handed stroke, the warning message that prompts you to left-handed is not displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the small hitting game state, only the right hitting may be more advantageous to the player than the left hitting, and in the small hitting game state, players other than the right hitting may also be the left hitting player. May be advantageous to. Further, in the small hitting game state, it is possible that the right hitting is more advantageous to the player than the left hitting, and in the small hitting gaming state, the right hitting is less advantageous to the player than the left hitting. There may be.

  Further, only in the small hitting game state, it may be more advantageous for the player to hit the right side than to hit the left side, and in the gaming state other than the small hitting state, the right hitting is better than the left hitting. May be advantageous to.

  Also, in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit gaming state, in a certain period after the small hit gaming state ends, It is not necessary to display only the display that urges the player to left-hand, or in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, and the game shifts to the small hit gaming state, During a certain period after the small hitting game state is over, no display other than the display urging the player to hit the left may be displayed. Also, in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit gaming state, in a certain period after the small hit gaming state ends, It is not always necessary to display a display that urges the player to left-hand, and in the first game state, when the small hit pattern is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, In a certain period after the small hitting game state ends, a display for urging the player to left may be displayed.

  Further, in the first gaming state, if the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the state shifts to the small hit gaming state, only in a certain period after the small hit gaming state ends. , It is not necessary to display a display that urges the player to left-hand, and in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the game shifts to the small hit gaming state, The display for urging the player to left-hand may not be displayed even during a period other than a certain period after the small hitting game state ends.

  Further, in the first gaming state, only when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and the small hit game state is entered, in a certain period after the small hit game state ends, It is not necessary to display a display that prompts the player to left-hand, and in the first gaming state, a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, and in a case other than when the small hit game state is entered. Also, in a certain period after the small hitting game state ends, the display for prompting the player to left-hand may not be displayed.

  Also, only in the first gaming state, if the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display and shifts to the small hit gaming state, in a certain period after the small hit gaming state ends. , It is not necessary to display a display that urges the player to left-hand, and even in a game state other than the first game state, a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol variation display, and the game shifts to the small hit game state. In this case, the display for prompting the player to left-hand may not be displayed for a certain period after the small hitting game state ends.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A gaming table characterized by that. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,
"Control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states [e.g., CPU 304 in the control unit 300],
An attacker in which a game ball can be won [eg, a first variable winning port 234a, a second variable winning port 235a],
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with,
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state in response to the result of the symbol variation display being a small hit [for example, in the second special figure display device 214, "special figure g" is A small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed a maximum of 12 times when a stop display is made and a small hit is executed, etc.],
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state (small hit rush state)), etc.,
The second game state is a small hit rush state in which the game balls are more likely to increase in relation to the small hit than the first game state [for example, in the small hit rush state, The result of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is easier to be displayed than the result of the symbol variation display of FIG.
One of the plurality of displays is a total winning prize number display [for example, the total winning prize number displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 37 (a)]. Display etc.]
The total prize ball count display is a display showing the total prize ball count obtained by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods advantageous to the player including the second game state [for example, The display of the total number of winning prize balls is displayed from the first big hit to the normal big hit until the electric support state which shifts after the big hit game related to the normal big hit is finished],
In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winnings may be added to the total number of prize balls display and displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. The number of prize balls played is not counted in the display of the total winning prize balls during the small hit game, and is counted up after the end of the small hit game, etc.],
In the second game state, if a certain condition [for example, a small winning pending rendezvous, etc.] is satisfied, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are in the attacker. Even if the player wins the prize, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is finished, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the total number of award balls displayed is the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker. Is added [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (e) to FIG. 37 (q), when the small hits are held consecutively, even if the small hit game related to the first small hit ends. The number of prize balls obtained in the first small hit game is added to the display of the total number of awarded balls even after the first small hit game is finished. First, after the small hit game related to the second small hit, which is a holding consecutive chan, is finished, the total number of prize balls obtained by adding up the number of prize balls obtained in the first small hit game and the second small hit game. Counting up on the display of numbers, etc.],
The certain condition is a condition in which the result of the symbol variation display being executed and the result of the symbol variation display in which execution is suspended include a plurality of results of the small hits [eg, FIG. As shown in (c), the result of the symbol variation display being executed and the result of the symbol variation display relating to the second hold is a small hit, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern variable display,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display in the first display mode [for example, a display mode in which the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen as shown in FIG. 37 (h)] May be displayed,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which a decorative pattern is largely displayed in the central portion of the display screen as shown in FIG. 37 (a)] May be displayed,
The size of the decorative design in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative design in the second display mode,
In the second gaming state, a period during execution of the symbol variation display that is suspended when the second state ends (hereinafter, "a certain period [eg, when the small hit game is suspended is suspended. The period until the four symbol variation displays are exhausted] ”.)), The decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but when the certain condition is satisfied. The display of the decorative symbol variable display in the second display mode is displayed even in the certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), the small hit game is held at the end. Of the symbol variation display that is being displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed large in the central portion of the display screen during execution of the symbol variation display that is a small hit],
A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was explained.
In addition, "a control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states [for example, the CPU 304 in the control unit 300],
An attacker in which a game ball can be won [eg, a first variable winning port 234a, a second variable winning port 235a],
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with,
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state in response to the result of the symbol variation display being a small hit [for example, in the second special figure display device 214, "special figure g" is A small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed a maximum of 12 times when a stop display is made and a small hit is executed, etc.],
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state (small hit rush state)), etc.,
The second game state is a small hit rush state in which the game balls are more likely to increase in relation to the small hit than the first game state [for example, in the small hit rush state, The result of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is easier to be displayed than the result of the symbol variation display of FIG.
One of the plurality of displays is a total winning prize number display [for example, the total winning prize number displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 in FIG. 37 (a)]. Display etc.]
The total prize ball count display is a display showing the total prize ball count obtained by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods advantageous to the player including the second game state [for example, The display of the total number of winning prize balls is displayed from the first big hit to the normal big hit until the electric support state which shifts after the big hit game related to the normal big hit is finished],
In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winnings may be added to the total number of prize balls display and displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. The number of prize balls played is not counted in the display of the total winning prize balls during the small hit game, and is counted up after the end of the small hit game, etc.],
In the second game state, if a certain condition [for example, a small winning pending rendezvous, etc.] is satisfied, the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls are in the attacker. Even if the player wins the prize, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is finished, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the total number of award balls displayed is the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker. Is added [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (e) to FIG. 37 (q), when the small hits are held consecutively, even if the small hit game related to the first small hit ends. The number of prize balls obtained in the first small hit game is added to the display of the total number of awarded balls even after the first small hit game is finished. First, after the small hit game related to the second small hit, which is a holding consecutive chan, is finished, the total number of prize balls obtained by adding up the number of prize balls obtained in the first small hit game and the second small hit game. Counting up on the display of numbers, etc.],
The certain condition is a condition in which the result of the symbol variation display being executed and the result of the symbol variation display in which execution is suspended include a plurality of results of the small hits [eg, FIG. As shown in (c), the result of the symbol variation display being executed and the result of the symbol variation display relating to the second hold is a small hit, etc.],
Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, the number of game balls won in the attacker is determined after the second state is finished. In the case where the number of award balls is not added to the total number of award balls display, the attacker becomes the second state after the second state ends, and the second state becomes After completion, in at least a part of the period until the addition of the number of award balls that has not yet been added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker to the total award ball number display , Is displayed in a state in which the display mode of the total number of winning spheres display is changed to another display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. While the addition of the number of award balls won in the first small hit game to the display of the total number of award balls is reserved, Such that the display color of the resulting award counts is highlighted,
A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "if the certain condition is satisfied, the result of the pattern change display of which execution is suspended includes the result that the attacker is changed to the second state. A display indicating at least that (hereinafter, referred to as "holding consecutive chan suggestion display [for example, display of" W-UP chance! "Shown in FIG. 37 (g)]".) "Is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “The pending consecutive chan suggestion display is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker ends the second state and starts the symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 37 (g)- As shown in FIG. 38 (h) and FIG. 38 (g) to FIG. 38 (h), the display of “W-UP chance!” Continues even after the small hit game ends and the symbol variation display starts. Are displayed as, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "the first game state is a normal game state,
A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

  Hereinafter, it will be additionally described including the above description.

(Appendix 1)
・ At least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probability is provided for pachinko machines that can be played ・ Providing means A game console that may execute a setting suggestion effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first setting suggestion effect”).

(Appendix 2)
・ Providing a control means capable of starting one of a plurality of game states ・ A first setting suggesting effect may be executed in a first game state (for example, a normal state) ・ Second game state A gaming table that may execute the first setting suggestion effect (for example, during a big hit or during electric support).

(Appendix 3)
-A game table that may execute the first suggestive setting effect during the period when the symbol variation display is not being executed (during demonstration or customization setting, if it is simply firing but does not win start prize).

(Appendix 4)
-The game table may be provided with another game ball detection means for the starting opening, the general winning opening, etc.-The first setting suggestion production may be executed in consideration of these detection results.

(Appendix 5)
When the condition for executing the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be performed at the first timing (for example, immediately) after the condition is satisfied. When the condition for executing the setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect is performed at the second timing after the condition is satisfied (for example, by judging the next change or condition of effect contents). Sometimes there are different game machines with different first and second timings.

(Appendix 6)
-A second setting suggestion effect with fixed timing (for example, the ending of a big hit game) can be executed.- A game table that may be executed in duplicate with the second setting suggestion effect.

(Appendix 7)
-A game table in which the first suggestive setting and the second suggestive effect overlap.

(Appendix 8)
-A game table in which the first setting suggestion production and the second setting suggestion production do not overlap.

(Appendix 9)
-The second setting suggestion effect with fixed timing (for example, the end of a big hit game) can be executed.-When the timing overlaps with the second setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion effect is delayed or executed. Not a gaming table.

(Appendix 10)
-A game table equipped with a notification means regarding the execution trigger of the first setting suggestion effect.

(Appendix 11)
・ At least a pachinko machine that can play with one of multiple settings with different jackpot probabilities ・ Equipped with effect means that can execute the first notification effect The first notification effect is a game table that is an effect that may be executed including a setting suggestion.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming table in which it may be possible to identify whether or not the first notification effect includes a setting suggestion.

  It should be noted that there may be cases where the identification is impossible. A setting suggestion may be included in the first notification effect executed at the following first timing.

(Appendix 13)
・ The first notification effect is executed at the first timing when the setting suggestion is not included. ・ The first notification effect is executed at the second timing different from the first timing when the setting suggestion is included. Playing table.

(Appendix 14)
-The first notification effect is at least a game table related to a big hit.

(Appendix 15)
A gaming table in which it is possible to identify that the first notification effect includes a setting suggestion because the display mode of the numbers is different.

(Appendix 16)
A gaming table in which a first notification effect including a setting suggestion is executed at a second timing when a certain condition is satisfied.

(Appendix 17)
-A game table with a different appearance rate when the first notification effect includes a setting suggestion.

(Appendix 18)
-A game table that can perform re-lottery.

(Appendix 19)
-A gaming table capable of displaying the number of drills (for example, a display for every "5000" shots).

(Appendix 21)
・ At least one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities that can be played Pachinko machine ・ Provided with means for performing re-lottery production ・ The game state after the jackpot may be the first game state -The game state after the jackpot may be the second game state-The re-lottery effect is an effect that at least suggests that the second game state will be started as the game state after the jackpot-re-lottery effect A gaming table where patterns may suggest settings.

  It is possible to provide a game console having a characteristic in the production means.

  Sorting may be different depending on sorting such as slow variation, high-speed variation, frame advance variation, and fall of a prize of re-lottery, and it may function as setting estimation.

(Appendix 22)
・ Display of decorative design variable display is possible ・ If the design (confirmed design) derived by re-lottery production is the first decorative design, the first gaming state or the second gaming state starts after the big hit game ends And, when the fixed symbol is the second decorative symbol (the first case), the second gaming state is started after the big hit game ends.-The second game state after the big hit game ends in the first case. The first effect that suggests that is started is performed (effects when promoting from "444" to "777" or "777" to "777")
・ In the case of the re-lottery effect in which the temporarily stopped design (provisional design) and the finalized design become the first decorative design (there are plural types such as "222" → "444", "444" → "444") There is a case where the effect is performed (the second case) -The re-lottery effect in the second case includes the setting suggestion (when not performed, the setting suggestion is not included)
Game table.

(Appendix 23)
・ If the fixed symbol is the first decorative symbol, promotion effect may be executed during the big hit game. ・ There are multiple types of first decorative symbol (A and B), and promotion effect is successful when A <B. Easy to play ・ If the temporary symbol is B and the final symbol is A, the re-lottery effect is an effect including setting suggestions.

  In some cases, it can be expected that the pattern itself will change.

(Appendix 24)
・ In the case of B → A, the first effect is executed (it seems to be downgraded, but promotion is neglected by the first effect)
Game table.

  In some cases, a sense of discomfort can be associated with the gaming value.

(Appendix 25)
・ In the case of A → A, the first effect may or may not be executed. ・ If the first effect is executed, the second gaming state is started after the jackpot game is over. If the effect is not executed, the gaming table in which the first gaming state or the second gaming state is started after the jackpot game is over.

(Appendix 26)
・ Definite symbol may be related to setting suggestion (decided symbol "444" in which the first effect was made → setting 4 or more etc. confirmed)
Game table.

(Appendix 31)
-It is a simultaneous variation machine-The attacker may open / close the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 variation-A game table that gives a look-ahead notice in the decorative symbol variation display at least during the period related to the opening / closing of the attacker.

  It is possible to provide a game machine having a characteristic of the advance notice means.

(Appendix 32)
-A game table where the pre-reading notice is started after the fluctuation stop of special figure 2.

(Appendix 33)
・ The variation (at least, the small hit variation) of Special Figure 2 is longer than the longest variation of Special Figure 1

  Since it is difficult to determine the timing of the pre-reading notice by grasping the contents of the decorative pattern variation display that is executed in association with the variation of the special figure 1, by starting after the derivation of the decorative symbol, the player does not disturb the player. Sometimes you can have expectations.

(Appendix 34)
-The pre-reading notice is a game table that is executed in connection with the suspension of Toku-zu 1 that is suspended at the start of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 that overlaps with the timing at which the opening / closing operation of the attacker due to the small hit starts.

(Appendix 35)
-A pre-reading notice does not include a notice about the change in Toku-zu 1 that is being executed, but is a game machine that targets the next and subsequent changes.

(Appendix 36)
-During the opening and closing period of the attacker, the fluctuation of special figure 1 is interrupted (real special figure fluctuation), and only the decorative symbol fluctuation display fluctuates.

  From the viewpoint of the special view, the prefetching advance notice may be executed in a certain period after being suspended during the opening / closing period of the attacker.

(Appendix 37)
・ Special map 2 After the start of fluctuation, special map 1 When special fluctuation starts
-A game table that may straddle multiple special map 1 fluctuations.

  However, it may be possible to show it in advance notice.

  In some cases, it may be possible to urge the firing to be stopped during a useless period in which a big hit lottery is not performed for a long period of time (when one is a big hit, the other is a lottery (defective determination)).

(Appendix 38)
-The above-mentioned irregularities of two points fluctuate mainly as a protagonist mainly during normal times-A game table that also performs decorative symbol variable display for special figure 1.

(Appendix 41)
-Providing display means for additionally displaying the number of prize balls acquired during a state advantageous to the player (during the first gaming state: during the small hit rush) -A winning game occurs during the first gaming state In this case, there is a case where the number of prize balls is not additionally displayed in the attacker winning a prize during the winning game and the additional displaying is collectively performed after the winning game is finished. If the game is being played (for example, a holding consecutive chan), the gaming table that does not display the addition and displays the addition collectively after the next hit game ends.

  It is possible to provide a game stand having a display means.

  It may be 3 consecutive chans or more.

  The condition other than the pending consecutive chan may be a certain change (including the next big hit confirmation).

(Appendix 42)
-A certain condition is a reserved consecutive chan.-A game console that does not perform an addition display but displays a reserved consecutive chan suggestion.

(Appendix 43)
-A game console that starts to fluctuate while displaying a pending rendition suggestion.

  It may be possible to start the fluctuations during the pending rendition suggestion so that the winning is immediate.

(Appendix 44)
・ A big hit and a small hit are included ・ A decorative pattern variable display is possible ・ A combination of a big hit design and a small hit design may stop in the same combination.

  A specific symbol (for example, "333" or "777") may be excluded.

(Appendix 45)
-The attacker is equipped with a decorative member on the front side of the opening / closing member.- The big hits include those with a long opening time, and the small hits have a short opening time and a large number of opening times.

  Depending on the type of hit, it may be difficult to identify by the combination of a big hit or a small hit attacker and a pattern.

(Appendix 46)
-Regarding the variation of the decorative pattern in the first gaming state, there are a first display mode and a second display mode-The size of the decorative pattern during the change is the first display mode> the second display mode The change related to the hold after the end is performed in at least the second display mode (for example, the change until four hold or the addition display ends).
・ If the fluctuation is out of the range in the second display mode, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the size corresponding to the second display mode, and if it is a hit, the stop display is in the first display mode. A gaming table.

  It may be possible to display the jackpot pattern suddenly by making the outlying part of the holding consecutive chan inconspicuous, and to make it appear as if the continuous chan was immediately followed.

(Appendix 47)
・ The period during which the display mode of the numbers on the prize ball display is not added (the period during which the pending rendition suggestion is being executed) is different (for example, mosaic, different colors, etc.)
Game table.

(Appendix 51)
・ Minimum configuration of the simultaneous fluctuation machine ・ Preliminary display related to interruption of fluctuation time measurement of special map A due to small hit of special map B A gaming table that is determined in relation to certain information that is played.

For example, in a game state where the special map A is the main (for example, special map high, general figure high), the special map A starts to change during the small hit change of the special map B, and the symbol stop of the special map A is the special map It is not before B small hit symbol stop (Appendix 52)
A sub-game table capable of specifying whether one of special map A and special map B is stopped first or whether special map B is a small hit according to certain information.

(Appendix 53)
・ There are multiple types of small hits (difficulty / long / short)
-Some information also includes the presence or absence of small hits and the type.-Sub is a game console that determines the content of the notice display according to the type of small hits in certain information.

  There may be different notice displays depending on the type of small hit, and as the prefetch notice, for example, the frequency of red display and the degree of expectation may be different.

(Appendix 54)
-The notice display is based on the look-ahead notice for special map A and the pending information at the start of fluctuation of special map A.

(Appendix 55)
-Start of effect display in response to start of fluctuation of special map A-A game table that proceeds without interrupting the effect display even when the fluctuation time measurement of special map A is suspended.

(Appendix 56)
・ Ordinary variable display configuration (for example, the display of a certain combination of decorative patterns is swaying → confirmed)
-A game table in which the display of a certain combination of decorative symbols is displayed before the notice display is displayed.

(Appendix 57)
・ If it is out of the way, shake fluctuation → Notice display → Confirm display (same / different as normal confirmation display) ・ In case of big hit, shake fluctuation → No notice → Confirm display (same / different as normal confirmation display) .

  It may be possible to prevent misunderstanding that it may be a revival jackpot if the fluctuation continues even though it is out of sync.

  The content of the notice display may be different between the case of losing with SP reach and the case of losing.

  In the SP reach where the degree of expectation is very high, the production stage may be changed after the shift (for example, a sorry zone).

  Missing → Warning display 1 → No stage change, SP reach 1 missed → Warning display 2 → No stage change, SP reach 1 missed (without small hit) → Stage change allowed , SP Reach 2 out of order → Advance notice 2 → Stage change is possible.

(Appendix 58)
-When a notice is displayed, the game console is always started after the end of the small hit of special figure B.

(Appendix 59)
・ Special game B A gaming table that does not display a notice when special game A starts to fluctuate during a small hit.

(Appendix 60)
-A game table in which a new special map B small hit change does not start when the special map A fluctuation starts while the special map B small hit changes.

(Appendix 61)
・ Special map B is a small hit while the special map A is fluctuating. ・ For a predetermined period after the special map B is a small hit, even if it hits to the right, it can be returned to the left and no notification is given. When you hit it, you can return it to left-handed, a game table that can be in three states of notifying, not performing, and performing.

(Appendix 71)
A production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
A plurality of game ball detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is accepted, at least one setting is selected from a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities,
One of the plurality of game ball detection means, the game ball detection means is an out ball detection means,
The out ball detection means is a means for detecting at least a game ball that has entered the out port,
One of the plurality of effects is a first setting suggestion effect,
The first setting suggesting effect is an effect that suggests at least the selected setting of the plurality of settings,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in association with the detection result of the out-ball detecting means,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming table according to appendix 71,
A control means capable of starting one of the plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state,
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
Execution of the first setting suggestive effect may be started in the first gaming state,
Execution of the first setting suggestive effect may be started in the second gaming state,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 71 or 72,
Execution of the first setting suggestive effect may be started in a period in which the symbol variation display is not executed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 74)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
One of the plurality of game ball detection means, the game ball detection means is a first game ball detection means,
The first game ball detection means is a means for detecting a game ball that has entered a winning opening,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied in association with the detection result of the first game ball detection means,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 74,
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a first timing,
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing,
The first timing and the second timing are different timings,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 76)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect different from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect,
Both the first setting suggestive effect and the second setting suggestive effect may be in a state of being executed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 77)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect different from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect,
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain period”), after the certain period elapses Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect different from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect,
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period when the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 71 to 78,
With an achievement degree suggesting means for suggesting at least the achievement degree of the first performance execution condition,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
A gaming machine provided with a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is accepted, at least one setting is selected from a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities,
One of the plurality of effects is a first notification effect,
The first notification effect is an effect including at least an information about a game,
The first notification effect is an effect that may include a suggestion of a selected setting of the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The gaming table according to appendix 81,
The first notification effect is an effect that may be executed in a manner capable of identifying that the suggestion of the setting is included,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The gaming table according to appendix 81 or 82,
Execution of the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion of the setting is started in the first case,
The execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is not started in the first case,
In a second case, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting may be started,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The gaming table according to appendix 83,
Execution of the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion of the setting in the second case is not started,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The gaming table according to appendix 83 or 84,
In the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is started,
Even in the second case, if the certain condition is not satisfied, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is not started,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 81 to 85,
The first notification effect is an effect related to at least a big hit,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 81 to 86,
In the first notification effect, suggestion of a selected setting among the plurality of settings is performed by a display mode of numbers,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 81 to 87,
Depending on the selected setting of the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting will be different,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 81 to 88,
One of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect,
The re-lottery effect is an effect that once displays the result of the big hit in the decorative pattern change display, restarts the decorative pattern change display, and then displays the result of the big hit again.
In the re-lottery effect, after the result of the big hit suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming the first advantageous state (hereinafter, referred to as "first big hit result") is temporarily displayed, There is also a case (hereinafter, referred to as "the third case") of displaying the result of the big hit which notifies that the second advantageous state is also advantageous,
In the re-lottery effect, there is a case where the first big hit result is once displayed and then the first big hit result is displayed again (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case").
The first notification effect may be executed in the re-lottery effect,
The first notification effect executed in the third case does not include the suggestion of the setting,
The first notification effect executed in the fourth case includes a suggestion for the setting,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 81 to 88,
One of the plurality of effects is an effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls,
The total prize ball count display is a display of at least the total prize ball count obtained in the jackpot game,
The first notification effect is an effect executed in the effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls,
Execution of the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion of the setting is started when the total acquisition award ball number display indicates a first number,
There is a case where the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is started when the total acquisition award ball number display indicates a second number,
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
A first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing the second symbol variable display,
Display means capable of displaying decorative pattern variable display,
An attacker that can win game balls,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the first symbol variation display,
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time,
The display means can display a decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variable display,
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display,
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
In the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol variation display until the variation time determined by the variation time determination means elapses, the attacker is the first in accordance with the result of the second symbol variation display. There are cases where there are two states (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"),
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice executed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display,
In the first case, the first notice may be executed in a period corresponding to a period in which the attacker is in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as “certain period”).
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 91,
The certain period is a period started after the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 93)
The gaming table according to appendix 91 or 92,
A control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state,
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
More than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first game state, at least the result that the attacker will change state to the second state is displayed. The length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol fluctuation display is longer,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming table according to Appendix 93,
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variable display,
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variable display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variable display,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 91 to 94,
In the first case, the first notice for the first symbol variation display, which is suspended when the attacker changes to the second state, may be executed.
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 91 to 95,
The first notice is not a notice regarding the first symbol variation display being executed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 91 to 96,
In the first case, in the period when the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends Then, the first variable display of the symbol is restarted,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 98)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 91 to 97,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The second notice is a notice about the second symbol variation display being executed,
The second notice is a notice that the execution may be started when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The gaming table described in Appendix 98,
The second notice may be executed across the first symbol variation display executed multiple times,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 91 to 99,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
Control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
An attacker that can win game balls,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game,
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state,
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a total prize ball count display,
The display of the total number of winning prize balls means that the player has won the attacker during the period from the state transition from the first game state to the second game state until the state transition to the first game state. It is a display showing the total number of prize balls that have been won,
In the second game state, when the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning prizes may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed.
In the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, After the end of the second state, the number of award balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of award winning balls display, and then the attacker becomes the second state. Then, after the second state is finished, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of award winning balls display,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 101,
The result of the game is a result of variable display of symbols,
The certain condition is, when the attacker makes a state transition from the first state to the second state, as a result of the symbol variation display that is suspended in execution, the attacker is placed in the second state. A condition that includes a result that changes state,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The gaming table described in Appendix 102,
If the certain condition is satisfied, at least the result that the attacker is in a state change to the second state is included in the result of the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended. A suggestion display (hereinafter referred to as "reservation consecutive chan suggestion display") is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The gaming table described in Appendix 103,
The pending consecutive chan suggestion display is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker has finished the second state and started the symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 101 to 104,
The second state is both a big hit game state and a small hit game state,
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern variable display,
In some cases, the result of the decorative symbol variation display that is to be transferred to the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol variation display that is to be transferred to the small hit game state are the same.
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 105,
A decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker, and the operation mode of the attacker is difficult for the player to visually recognize,
The operation mode of the attacker is different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The gaming table according to Appendix 105 or 106,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display may be displayed in the first display mode,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display may be displayed in the second display mode,
The size of the decorative design in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative design in the second display mode,
In the second gaming state, during the period during which the symbol variation display is being held when the second state is finished (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period"), in the first display mode. The decorative symbol variable display is displayed, but when the certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the second display mode even during the certain period.
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 101 to 107,
Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state has ended. In the case where the number of award balls is not added to the total number of award balls display, the attacker becomes the second state after the second state ends, and the second state becomes After the end, until the total number of award balls is added to the total number of award balls that has not been added according to the number of awarding game balls to the attacker, the total number of award balls is displayed. Change the display mode of to another display mode,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 101 to 108,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
A first symbol display means capable of executing the first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing the second symbol variable display,
An attacker that can win game balls,
Variation time determining means for determining the variation time of the first symbol variation display,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
Main control means capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means,
A sub-control means capable of controlling at least the display means,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time,
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state in response to the result of the second symbol variation display being a small hit,
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
In the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol variation display until the variation time determined by the variation time determination means elapses, the result of the second symbol variation display is the small hit. There is a case (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) in which the attacker is in the second state according to
In the first case, a period from the result of the second symbol variation display is the small hit until the period in which the attacker is in the second state elapses, of the first symbol variation display. The progress of the variable time is interrupted (hereinafter referred to as “a certain state”),
One of the plurality of displays is a first notice display,
The first notice display may be displayed in association with the certain state,
The first notice display is a display displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
The sub control means is a means for performing control according to a command from the main control means,
When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started, the display mode of the first notice display is determined in relation to a certain command transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means.
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The gaming table described in Appendix 111,
Which of the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display is first stopped and displayed by the certain command received during execution of the second symbol variation display Is a means that can identify
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The gaming table according to Appendix 111 or 112,
The sub-control means is a means capable of specifying whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by the certain command.
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 111 to 113,
There are a plurality of types of small hits in which the aspect of the second state is different,
The display mode of the first notice display is determined according to the type of the small hit,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 115)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 111 to 114,
In the first case, the first notice display is a display of a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. Is,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 116)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 111 to 115,
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern variable display,
The display means can display a decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variable display,
Even in the case of the certain state, the decorative symbol variable display is continuously displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 117)
The gaming table described in appendix 116,
The time from the start of a certain decorative pattern variation display in the case of the certain state to the start of display of the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display with a fluctuation, and the case of not being in the certain state It is the same time from the start of the decorative pattern variable display to the display start of the result of the certain decorative pattern variable display by shaking fluctuation,
When the certain decorative symbol variation display in the case of the certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 118)
The gaming table according to Appendix 116 or 117,
In the case where the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of the certain state is the result of the deviation, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variable display with the swing variation, the first symbol variable display is stopped and displayed. In the period up to, the first notice display may be displayed,
When the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of being in a certain state is a big hit result, after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a swing variation, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period up to, the first notice display may not be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 119)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 111 to 118,
When the first notice display is displayed, it is started after the display of the first notice display is always in the certain state,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 120)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 111 to 119,
If the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in the certain state, the first notice display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 121)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 111 to 120,
A control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state,
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
More than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first game state, at least the result that the attacker will change state to the second state is displayed. The length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol fluctuation display is longer,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 122)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 121,
By hitting the right, it becomes easier to win game balls to the attacker,
In the first gaming state, if the second symbol variation display is the small hit and the attacker is in the second state, a certain period after the second state is finished. Then, do not display the display prompting the player to left-hand,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 131)
A gaming machine provided with a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is accepted, at least one setting is selected from a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities,
One of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect,
There may be a transition to the first gaming state after the jackpot game is over,
After the jackpot game is over, it may shift to the second game state,
A game state in which the second game state is more advantageous than the first game state,
The re-lottery effect is an effect that may at least suggest transitioning to the second gaming state after the jackpot game is over,
In the re-lottery effect, there may be a suggestion regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by that.

  According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic of the rendering means.

(Appendix 132)
The gaming table described in Appendix 131,
The re-lottery effect is an effect that once displays the result of the big hit in the decorative pattern change display, restarts the decorative pattern change display, and then displays the result of the big hit again.
In the re-lottery effect, once the result of the big hit suggesting that there is a possibility of becoming the first game state (hereinafter, referred to as "first big hit result") is displayed, the second game state. There is a case where the result of the big hit which notifies that it becomes (hereinafter, referred to as "the third case"),
In the re-lottery effect, there is a case where the first big hit result is once displayed and then the first big hit result is displayed again (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case").
In the fourth case, after the jackpot game is over, it may shift to the first gaming state,
In the fourth case, after the jackpot game is over, it may shift to the second game state,
In the third case, after the jackpot game is over, transition to the second gaming state,
In the third case, the first effect is performed,
In the fourth case, the first effect may be performed,
The first effect that is performed in the third case is an effect that suggests that the game state shifts to the second game state after the jackpot game is over,
The first effect performed in the fourth case is an effect including a suggestion regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 133)
The gaming table described in Appendix 132,
In the fourth case, in the big hit game, there may be a promotion effect of whether or not to shift to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
As a result of the first big hit, a combination of the first decorative pattern may be displayed,
As a result of the first big hit, a combination of second decorative patterns may be displayed,
The combination of the first decorative design and the combination of the second decorative design is a combination of different decorative designs,
In the fourth case, when the combination of the first decorative pattern is once displayed and then the combination of the second decorative symbol is displayed, the second game after the jackpot game is finished in the promotion effect. It is easy to be notified that it will shift to the state,
In the fourth case, when the combination of the first decorative pattern is displayed after being displayed once with the combination of the second decorative pattern, there is a suggestion regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings. included,
A gaming table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect that the combination of the big hit symbols will change.

(Appendix 134)
The gaming table according to Appendix 133,
In the fourth case, the first effect is performed when the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after being displayed once with the combination of the second decorative symbols,
A gaming table characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, a sense of incongruity may be associated with the gaming value.

(Appendix 135)
The gaming table according to Appendix 133 or 134,
In the fourth case, there may be a case where the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed once after being displayed with the combination of the first decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "fifth case"),
There is a case where the first effect is executed in the fifth case (hereinafter, referred to as “sixth case”),
There is a case where the first effect is not executed in the fifth case (hereinafter, referred to as “seventh case”),

In the sixth case, after the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts to the second game state,
In the case of the seventh, there is a case where it shifts to the first game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the seventh case, there is a case where the game state of the valley shifts to after the big hit game ends.
A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix 136)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 133 to 135,
In the fourth case, the combination of decorative symbols finally confirmed and displayed may be a suggestion regarding the setting,
A gaming table characterized by that.

  FIG. 39 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 39, a predetermined number of game media (eg, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launch means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launch means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

  It should be noted that a mode in which the display means 903 described above is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and this display means 903 is further provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hit operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, or when the long press automatic continuous hit function is in an effective state, the touch panel It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be set to an effective state. Further, in some of the effects, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, on the touch panel, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated, may not be activated, or may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. . In addition, when there are a plurality of effects by the continuous tapping operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press automatic continuous tapping function may not be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured in a small number. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 39 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine for use. May be performed by credit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a slot machine (rotating cylinder game machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 40 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 40 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 40), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed, and the slot machine 1000 has It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, each pattern is printed on the belt-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are formed by attaching the belt-shaped member to a predetermined circular tubular frame member. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, and a total of 9 symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 1014 that is activated. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet is placed on the medal, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is effective, and when two bets are placed on the medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When three bets are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right horizontal line. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes effective may be referred to as an effective line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing that the player can insert a game medal. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three coins. When the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two coins are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed, three coins are inserted. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. It should be noted that the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals have been inserted, a game start for informing that a game start operation is possible is started. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 126 is a display device for displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. It should be noted that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed to remove the medal. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settlement of the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 may be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or may be operated in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can be in a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting player's individual game history information), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operating means.

  Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and affixing various certificates is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. Below the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A rendering device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 that includes two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown in the drawings) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , A production image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It is a structure that appears on the person side).

  It should be noted that it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. It may be a reel (drum) or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may look odd. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be a curved surface.

  The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and displays a lottery result on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and electronic data that realizes the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data about the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired data about the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 7D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program in which a real machine such as a pachinko machine or the like is simulatedly executed for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the embodiments, examples, modification examples, various examples, and supplementary notes described above, the constituent requirements of other embodiments, examples, and It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like. That is, as long as there are no factors that hinder the application, constituent elements included only in the description of each of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, and supplementary notes, other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples and supplementary notes, it will be established as a cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Rendering button 208 Decorative symbol display device 210 Ordinary symbol display device 212 1st special symbol display device 214 2nd special symbol display device 226a General prize opening 230 1st special symbol starting port (above)
231 1st Special Drawing Start Gate (Bottom)
232 2nd special drawing starting opening 234a 1st variable winning opening 235a 2nd variable winning opening 240 Out opening 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 first sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 Memory SWout Out ball detection sensor

Claims (6)

Control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
An attacker that can win game balls,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Symbol variable display results a state change available-the second state the attacker from a first state in response to become Koatari,
The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
One of the plurality of game states is a first game state,
One of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
Wherein the second gaming state is that it related game ball with increased easily Koatari lash state to be the Koatari than the first game condition,
One of the plurality of displays is a total prize ball count display,
The total prize ball count display is a display showing the total prize ball count obtained by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods advantageous to the player including the second game state,
In the second game state, when the attacker becomes the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game ball to the attacker after the second state ends. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning prizes may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed.
In the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, After the end of the second state, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, and then the attacker becomes the second state. Then, after the second state is completed, addition of the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker to the total acquired award ball number display is performed ,
The certain condition is a condition in which the result of the symbol variation display being executed and the result of the symbol variation display in which execution is suspended include a plurality of the results of the small hit,
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern variable display,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display may be displayed in the first display mode,
In the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variable display may be displayed in the second display mode,
The size of the decorative design in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative design in the second display mode,
In the second gaming state, during the period during which the symbol variation display is being held when the second state is finished (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain period"), in the first display mode. The decorative symbol variable display is displayed, but when the certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the second display mode even during the certain period.
A gaming table characterized by that. Control means capable of controlling one of the plurality of game states,
  An attacker that can win game balls,
  Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
A gaming machine equipped with,
  It is possible to change the state of the attacker from the first state to the second state in response to the result of the symbol variation display being a small hit,
  The second state is a state in which gaming balls are easier to win in the attacker than the first state,
  One of the plurality of game states is a first game state,
  One of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
  The second game state is a small hit rush state in which the game balls are likely to increase in association with the small hit compared to the first game state,
  One of the plurality of displays is a total prize ball count display,
  The total prize ball count display is a display showing the total prize ball count obtained by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods advantageous to the player including the second game state,
  In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the game balls to the attacker after the second state ends. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning prizes may be added to the total number of prize balls displayed and displayed.
  In the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls are won in the attacker, After the end of the second state, the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is not added to the total number of awarded prize balls display, and then the attacker becomes the second state. Then, after the second state is finished, the number of award balls not yet added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total number of award winning balls display,
  The certain condition is a condition in which the result of the small variation is included in the result of the symbol variation display being executed and the result of the symbol variation display in which the execution is suspended,
  Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, depending on the number of winning game balls to the attacker after the second state has ended. In the case where the number of award balls is not added to the total number of award balls display, the attacker becomes the second state after the second state ends, and the second state is After the end, in at least a part of the period until the addition of the number of award balls that has not yet been added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker to the total number of award balls , Is displayed in a state in which the display mode of the total number of winning prize balls display is changed to another display mode,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1 or 2,
If the certain condition is satisfied, at least the result that the attacker is in a state change to the second state is included in the result of the symbol variation display whose execution is suspended. A suggestion display (hereinafter referred to as "reservation consecutive chan suggestion display") is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 3,
The pending consecutive chan suggestion display is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker has finished the second state and started the symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
  The first gaming state is a normal gaming state,
A gaming table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
  The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by that.